JP2008167821A - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko machine capable of preventing malfunction in Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 caused by heat. <P>SOLUTION: Heat is hardly accumulated in a package of a drive IC 1 because driving data are created in such a way that chips of diodes FBD1 and FBD2 for absorbing flyback voltage and chips of diodes FBD3 and FBD4 for absorbing flyback voltage can alternately radiate heat. As a result, the joint temperature of the Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 does not rise to a junction temperature, and therefore, malfunction in the Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 caused by heat can be prevented. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko machine with a countermeasure against heat.

  Conventionally, a main control board (main control board) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control board (peripheral control board) that controls the rendering device (decoration unit) based on a control signal from the main control board A pachinko gaming machine (pachinko machine) provided with a driver board (lamp driving board) that exclusively controls a lamp (light emitting means) has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). In the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1, for example, when there is an increase or decrease in the number of light emitting means, it is possible to cope with the problem by replacing only the lamp driving board without lowering the main control board and the peripheral control board. Yes.

  There has also been proposed a pachinko machine (pachinko machine) that increases the interest of the player by arranging a plurality of full-color light emitting diodes (light emitting means) on the game board and the frame (front frame) and controlling the lighting ( For example, Patent Document 2). In the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 2, a lamp substrate (lamp driving substrate) controls lighting of the light emitting means.

By the way, in recent pachinko machines, as the liquid crystal display is enlarged to the same size as a notebook computer of 15 inches or the like, a space for attaching the main control board, the peripheral control board, the lamp driving board, etc. to the back of the game board is secured. It's getting harder. In addition to the large-sized liquid crystal display, for example, by providing an extremely large number of light emitting means on a decoration unit, a game board, or the like, or by providing a movable body that can be moved to the decoration unit, the production effect is further enhanced. As described above, when the number of light emitting means is increased, the arrangement space for the board on which the light emitting means is mounted is eliminated, and thus the light emitting means may be mounted on the lamp driving board. The lamp driving substrate is also mounted with a drive IC for driving an electric drive source of the movable body, and the drive IC and the light emitting means coexist on the lamp driving substrate. In addition, the lamp driving board transmits heat generated from the light emitting means mounted on the large liquid crystal display or the board, and the light emitting means and the drive IC mounted on the lamp driving board also generate heat. The surroundings are in a state where heat is stored.
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-210797 (FIG. 1) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-190410 (FIG. 15)

  However, since the pachinko machines are lined up behind the pachinko island facility, the temperature in the pachinko island facility is high due to heat generated from the power supply board, various control boards, light emitting means, and the like of the pachinko machine. As a result, the efficiency of radiating the heat absorbed by the lamp drive board (transferred heat) to the surrounding area is reduced, so that heat is stored in the electronic component package (for example, a drive IC package), and the package temperature becomes the junction temperature. If the value is too high, the electronic component will fail.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The place made into the objective is to provide the pachinko machine which can prevent the failure of the electronic component by heat.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, a corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
A game board having a game area defined, a plurality of light emitting means attached to the game board and capable of emitting light, and a four-phase stepping motor having A phase, / A phase, B phase and / B phase A movable unit, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, a command transmitted from the main control board, and the plurality of light emitting means based on the received command The peripheral control board that transmits the light emission data of the four-phase stepping motor to the subordinate board, the main control board and the peripheral control board are provided separately from each other, and the plurality of light emitting means A pachinko machine having a part mounted thereon and a lamp driving board that receives the light emission data and the driving data, wherein the lamp driving board includes at least the received light emitting data. A light emission control IC that outputs a light emission signal to the plurality of light emission means based on the data, and a drive IC that outputs an excitation signal to the four-phase stepping motor based on the received drive data. A phase A transistor chip for outputting the excitation signal to phase A of the 4-phase stepping motor, a phase / A transistor chip for outputting the excitation signal to phase A of the 4-phase stepping motor, and A B-phase transistor chip that outputs the excitation signal to the B-phase of the four-phase stepping motor, a / B-phase transistor chip that outputs the excitation signal to the / B-phase of the 4-phase stepping motor, and the 4-phase stepping motor For the A phase flyback voltage absorption, which converts the back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is cut off into the A phase A back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is cut off at the / A phase of the four-phase stepping motor is formed into a chip with an Iode and the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode / A flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase A, a flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase B that converts back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is interrupted to phase B of the stepping motor into heat, and the B A flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase, which is formed into a chip and converts the back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is interrupted to the / B phase of the four-phase stepping motor into heat / B phase flyback A voltage absorption diode, and the drive data includes a chip of the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode and the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode. The pachinko machine is made so that heat can be dissipated alternately between the B-phase flyback voltage absorbing diode and the / B-phase flyback voltage absorbing diode chip.

  This pachinko machine includes a game board, a decoration unit, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and a lamp driving board. The game board is divided into game areas, and the decoration unit is attached to the game board. The decoration unit includes a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light, and a movable body device including a four-phase stepping motor having A phase, / A phase, B phase, and / B phase. The main control board controls the progress of the game, and the peripheral control board receives a command transmitted from the main control board. The peripheral control board transmits the light emission data of the plurality of light emitting means and the drive data of the four-phase stepping motor to the lamp drive board based on the received command. The lamp driving board that receives the light emission data and the driving data is provided separately from the main control board and the peripheral control board, and a part of the plurality of light emitting means is mounted.

  The lamp driving substrate includes a light emission control IC and a drive IC. The light emission control IC outputs light emission signals to a plurality of light emission means based on the received light emission data, and the drive IC outputs an excitation signal to the four-phase stepping motor based on the received drive data.

  The drive IC includes an A-phase transistor chip, an / A-phase transistor chip, a B-phase transistor chip, and a / B-phase transistor chip. The A-phase transistor chip outputs an excitation signal to the A-phase of the 4-phase stepping motor, the / A-phase transistor chip outputs the excitation signal to the / A-phase of the 4-phase stepping motor, and the B-phase transistor chip has the 4-phase An excitation signal is output to the B phase of the stepping motor, and the / B phase transistor chip outputs an excitation signal to the / B phase of the four-phase stepping motor.

  The drive IC further includes a flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase A, a flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase A, a flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase B, and a flyback voltage absorbing diode for phase B. The A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode and the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode are formed into chips, and the B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode and the / B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode are formed into chips. It has become.

  The A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode converts the back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is interrupted to the A-phase of the 4-phase stepping motor into heat, and the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode is the 4-phase The back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is interrupted to the / A phase of the stepping motor is converted into heat, and the flyback voltage absorption diode for the B phase is applied when the excitation signal is interrupted to the B phase of the stepping motor. The generated back electromotive force is converted into heat, and the / B phase flyback voltage absorption diode converts the back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is cut off into the / B phase of the 4-phase stepping motor into heat. Yes. The converted heat means heat generated from the chips of the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode and the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode, the B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode, and the / B-phase flyback. Heat generated from the chip of the voltage absorbing diode is absorbed by the package of the drive IC.

  Driving data includes a flyback voltage absorption diode for A phase and a flyback voltage absorption diode chip for A phase, a flyback voltage absorption diode for B phase, and a flyback voltage absorption diode chip for B phase. And are created so that heat can be dissipated alternately.

  As described above, the drive data includes the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode and the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode chip, the B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode, and the / B-phase flyback voltage absorption. Since the diode chip and the diode chip can be radiated alternately, it is difficult to store heat in the package of the drive IC. Thereby, the junction temperature of the A phase transistor chip, the / A phase transistor chip, the B phase transistor chip, and the / B phase transistor chip does not increase to the junction temperature. Therefore, failure of the A phase transistor chip, the / A phase transistor chip, the B phase transistor chip, and the / B phase transistor chip due to heat can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the game area 37 in FIG. 9 corresponds to a game area, the game board 5 in FIG. 9 corresponds to a game board, and the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ in FIG. 36 correspond to a plurality of light emitting means. 46 corresponds to a four-phase stepping motor, the distribution device 330 in FIG. 29 corresponds to a movable body device, the decoration unit 240 in FIG. 26 corresponds to a decoration unit, and the main control in FIG. The board 94 corresponds to the main control board, and the command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the process of step S16 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 corresponds to the transmitted command. The lamp data LP-DAT 42 corresponds to the light emission data, the drive data MT-DAT in FIG. 42 corresponds to the drive data, the peripheral control board 92 in FIG. 41 corresponds to the peripheral control board, and FIG. The light emitting means 314 ′ corresponds to “a part of the plurality of light emitting means”, the lamp driving board 532 in FIG. 41 corresponds to the lamp driving board, the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 2 corresponds to the pachinko machine, The “gradation lighting signal” corresponds to the light emission signal, the gradation control IC groups A to E in FIG. 44 correspond to the light emission control IC, the “drive pulse (excitation signal)” corresponds to the excitation signal, and the drive in FIG. IC1 corresponds to the drive IC, the Darlington power transistor PTr1 in FIG. 47 corresponds to the A-phase transistor chip, the Darlington power transistor PTr2 in FIG. 47 corresponds to the / A-phase transistor chip, and the Darlington power transistor PTr3 in FIG. Corresponds to the B phase transistor chip, and the Darlington power transistor PTr4 in FIG. The flyback voltage absorption diode FBD1 in FIG. 47 corresponds to the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode, and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD2 in FIG. 47 corresponds to the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode. 47 corresponds to the B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode, and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD4 in FIG. 47 corresponds to the / B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode. "As the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350, A phase, B phase, / A phase and / B phase "Corresponds to the drive data that has been created.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, failure of electronic components due to heat can be prevented.

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 2 shows a state in which the main body frame is opened on one side of the outer frame of the pachinko machine and the front frame is further opened on one side of the main body frame. It is a perspective view. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative member in the game area is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. On one side of the front surface of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 is attached by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[About the frame structure]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main frame of the pachinko machine and the game board separated from the front right and diagonally.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12, and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 2). A main body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the front frame body 11, and a hinge pin and a hinge with respect to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions on one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed by a hole. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is comprised by the outer frame side hinge tool 14, the main body frame side hinge tool 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17. In addition, in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[About front frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes. In addition, a substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. Further, a window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is mounted on the window frame 39. . Further, substantially the entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, around the opening window 38, a side decoration device 52 is mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic decoration device 53 is mounted on the upper portion. The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit. A button 59 that can be operated by the player is provided on the left side of the upper plate 51.

[Configuration of locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted. That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that detachably engage with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that detachably engage with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the front end of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. A cylinder lock 75 that is exposed through the front frame 11 and the lower front plate 30 is provided so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[About the structure of the game board mounting frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11, and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. . The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 9). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78. A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. It is configured to be guided by the lower plate 31. Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A substrate holder 91 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided. A peripheral control board box 93 in which a peripheral control board 92 such as a waveform control board or an illumination control board is accommodated is mounted on the rear side of the board holder 91, and is superimposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 93. In this state, a main control board box 95 in which the main control board 94 is housed is mounted. Further, in a state where the board holder 91, the peripheral control board box 93, and the main control board box 95 are respectively attached to the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The board holder 91, the peripheral control board box 93, and the main control board box 95 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5.

[Configuration of body frame mechanism mounting body, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.

  A tank mounting portion 111, a rail mounting portion 112, a dispensing device mounting portion 113, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 114 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 111. The ball tank 114 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape that opens upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from an island facility (pachinko island facility) can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 114 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 114. In addition, a discharge port 116 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 115 of the ball tank 114, and the bottom plate portion 115 is formed on an inclined surface inclined downward toward the discharge port 116. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 112 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 111 downward, and the rail component 117 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 112 so that the tank rail 118 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 112 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118. An inclined rail shelf 120 that is inclined downward from one end (left end toward FIG. 8) to the other end (right end toward FIG. 8) is formed along the lower edge of the recess. An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 120 is used as a rail receiving portion 121.

  A rail constituting member 117 which is mounted on the rail mounting portion 112 and constitutes the tank rail 118 includes a rear wall portion 122 which forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 112 and the front wall portion 119, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation. The rail constituting member 117 is attached to the rail attaching portion 112 by an appropriate attachment means, thereby forming a tank rail 118 having a plurality of front and rear rows of rail passages. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 116 of the ball tank 114 (falling due to its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 118, the game balls follow the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage. Further, in this embodiment, the rail constituent member 117 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 122 of the rail constituent member 117. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118 (rail mounting portion 112) is separated from the first space portion in order to avoid interference with the upper end portion of the rear portion of the equipment (for example, an accessory) protruding to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in the state. In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 120 that is the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 118 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 114. In other words, the tank rail 118 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 114 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 114. As a result, a first space portion is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 119 of the tank rail 118 to avoid interference with the rear portion of the equipment (for example, an accessory). .

  Above the tank rail 118, a rectifying body 123 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 124. The rectifier 123 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 113 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 125 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 113 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side. In addition, an opening 127 through which a payout motor 126 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 125 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 113. Yes.

  In a state where the ball payout device 125 is mounted in the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion that is substantially at the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the payout device mounting portion 113, the rear end of the rail shelf 120, the ball tank 114, the tank rail 118, and the ball payout device 125 are substantially the same surface. ing.

  The ball payout device 125 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113, and is unitized by mounting various components related to payout. The ball payout device 125 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 113 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). It has become.

  Although not shown, the ball payout device 125 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 118 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). In addition, downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are branched into two forks to form front and rear rows of prize balls, a ball rental ball passage, and a ball removal ball passage. In addition, a payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at a branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit 130 that is assembled with a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 128 that operates the launching hammer, and the like, assembled on the mounting substrate 129. Is installed. In addition, a power supply board box 132 that accommodates the power supply board 131 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 133 is placed in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 132. A payout control board box 134 to be accommodated is mounted. The payout control board 133 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 94 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 126 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 135 (see FIG. 6) and the main control board box 95 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. . And between the side wall part which comprises one side wall of the window opening part of the mechanism mounting body 13, and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting part 113 which comprises the other side wall, a substantially square box shape is formed by an opaque synthetic resin material. The formed rear cover body 136 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 137.

  The rear cover body 136 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 138 and a peripheral wall portion 139 protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 138. Of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, the wall portion 139 a on one side is attached and detached from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 140 formed at a total of three positions above and below the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 142 having a hinge pin 141 that can be fitted downward is integrally formed. Further, of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, the other wall portion 139 b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 113. The elastic closing body 143 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 136, the hinge pins 141 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 142 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 140 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 136 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 141, and the elastic closing body 143 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 113. The rear cover body 136 is held in a closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 136 covers the entire display device control board box 135 (see FIG. 6) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 95 by the rear cover body 136. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 94 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 95 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display apparatus control board) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 95 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 136. The inspection connector 144 arranged on the main control board 94 is exposed at the lower part of the main control board box 95, and the inspection connector on the main control board 94 is closed with the rear cover body 136 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 144 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 145, 146, 147, and 148 are provided in the rear cover body 136, and internal heat is released from the large number of heat radiation holes 145, 146, 147, and 148. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 136 is provided with a number of slit-like heat radiation holes 145 extending from the peripheral wall portion 139 to the rear wall portion 138, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 138 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical and elliptical heat radiation holes 146 are provided, and a large number of elliptical and elliptical heat radiation holes 147 and a predetermined number of laterally rectangular heat radiation holes 148 penetrate the lower portion of the rear wall 138. It is installed.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation hole 148 has a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of a plurality of parallel seal portions 149 sealed by the seal screw (sealing member) of the main control board box 95. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 136 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 149 of the main control board box 95 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 148. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 136 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 149 of the main control board box 95 can be easily visually confirmed. In addition, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled as compared with the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 136 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 139 of the rear cover body 136, at a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper side wall portion 139c, a power cord (not shown) is held in a substantially folded state so as to be appropriately folded. An elastically deformable cord holder 150 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 118 (the rear wall surface of the rail component member 117). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 150 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 150.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 152 of the power distribution board 151, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet of the Pachinko Island facility, and a power switch 151a provided on the power distribution board 151 The pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by operating. As described above, by forming the cord holder 150 integrally with the rear cover body 136 and holding the power cord, the power cord hangs when the pachinko machine 1 is transported and stored, or it may become an obstacle. The trouble which is caught can be prevented.

  Electric power (AC 24 V (AC 24 V)) supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 131 via the distribution board 151. In the power supply board 131, various voltages are created from the supplied power and supplied to the payout control board 133 and the like via the power supply relay terminal plate 540 provided above the power supply board 131. For example, the payout control board 133 supplies the supplied various voltages to the main control board 92 and the launch control board 550, as will be described in detail later. The launch control board 550 is accommodated in the launch control board box 551 and is arranged on the left side of the payout control board 113.

  An external terminal board 560 for outputting various information related to the game is attached below the cord holder 150. Various output terminals of the external terminal board 560 are electrically connected to a hall computer grounded to the hall, and grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the like.

[About the configuration of ball derivatives etc. for the lower pan of the rear lower part of the main body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 153 is attached to the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear stepped portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 153 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connection path (not shown) from the winning ball and rental ball passage of the ball dispensing device 125 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 155 that houses the interface board 154 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower dish ball derivative 153. The interface board 154 is interposed between the ball lending machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 133, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball lending between the ball lending machine and the payout control board 133. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the general structure of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front view of a game board having a game area. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the game board from the diagonally upper right front, and FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board from the diagonally upper left front. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the game board obliquely from the rear. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 9, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view showing the game board disassembled for each major component and shown obliquely from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view showing the game board separated for each major component and shown obliquely from the rear.

  As described above, the game board 5 of the present example is provided with the guide rail 78 including the outer rail 76 and the inner rail 77, and the game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78. In other words, the outer periphery of the game area 37 is defined by the guide rail 78 of the front component member 79. In the game area 37, a frame-shaped central accessory 200 is disposed at a substantially central portion thereof, and is visible from the front (player) through the frame of the central accessory 200 behind the central accessory 200. The effect display device 202 is provided. Further, the game area 37 is provided with a gate 204 in which a game ball can be currencyd on the left side of the central bonus 200, and a gate sensor 206 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 204 is provided in the gate 204. Is provided (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

  In the game area 37, a variable winning ball apparatus 210 is disposed below the center of the central accessory 200. The variable winning ball apparatus 210 includes a first start port 212 that is always open upward and allows a game ball to enter, a second start port 214 provided below the first start port 212, and a first start port 212. A first start port sensor 216 (see FIG. 41) for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball, a second start port sensor 218 (see FIG. 41) for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start port 214, A pair of movable pieces 222 that are disposed on both sides of the two start ports 214 and are rotated about a lower portion by a start port solenoid 220 (see FIG. 41) and can open and close the second start port 214 are provided.

  The second starting port 214 in the variable winning ball apparatus 210 is normally closed by a first starting port 212 positioned above and a movable piece 222 positioned on both sides of the second starting port 214 so that a game ball enters the ball. It is in a difficult closed state, and the pair of movable pieces 222 are rotated by driving the start opening solenoid 220 so that the game ball can be opened from the left and right directions. The opening / closing control of the movable piece 222 is controlled based on the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 204 and is detected by the gate sensor 206. In this example, a game ball enters the first start port 212 and a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out based on the detection by the first start port sensor 216. A game ball enters the second start port 214, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out based on detection by the second start port sensor 218.

  The game area 37 is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 224 that are always open and into which game balls can enter, and a predetermined number of game balls are entered based on the game balls entering the general winning holes 224. Is paid out. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 224 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 226 (see FIGS. 34 and 41), and the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 224 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 226. Based on this, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. In addition, the game area 37 is provided with an out-port 228 at the bottom of the game area 37 through which game balls that have flowed down and have not entered any of the prize-winning holes or prize-winning devices are discharged from the game area 37.

  In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 210 and each general winning port 224 are integrally assembled as the winning port unit 234.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9, the game area 37 is provided with a number of obstacle nails 230 on the front surface thereof in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill 232 is provided at an appropriate position on the front surface of the central accessory 200. Therefore, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the behavior of the game ball becomes interesting. The obstacle nail 230 is shown only in FIG. 9, and the other figures are omitted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the gaming board 5 of this example has a size in front view substantially corresponding to the gaming area 37 and has a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction and can emit light. A frame-shaped decoration unit 240 having a light emitting decoration body 238, a central accessory 200 arranged on the front side of the decoration unit 240 and arranged in the game area 37, a gate 204, a winning opening unit 234, and a predetermined gauge arrangement A transparent plate-like holding plate 242 that can hold a plurality of obstacle nails 230 and the like arranged on the front side, and a front component member 79 that supports the outer periphery of the holding plate 242 and sandwiches the holding plate 242 on the front side. A frame-shaped holding plate support frame 244 to which the decoration unit 240 is attached is further provided on the rear surface side.

  An effect display device 202 is attached to the rear side of the decoration unit 240 so as to be visible to the player through the inside of the frame, and the inner shape of the frame of the decoration unit 240 and the frame of the central accessory 200 The inner shape of is approximately the same size.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, in this game board 5, the holding plate 242 for holding the obstacle nail 230 and the like is a transparent plate material, and therefore the decoration unit 240 disposed on the rear side of the holding plate 242. The whole (front side) can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the obstacle nail 230 and the like held by the holding plate 242 can be visually recognized as floating in the air.

  In addition, the game board 5 is a board for guiding and discharging game balls discharged from the out-port and game balls that enter the winning opening and the like and discharge out of the game area 37 to the outside of the game board 5. A holder 91 is attached to the lower part on the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244. A peripheral control board box 93 and a main control board box 95 are attached to the rear side of the board holder 91 in order from the front (see FIG. 13). The board holder 91 is provided with a ball discharge sensor 248 that can detect a game ball discharged from the game board 5.

  In this example, the effect display device 202 is a 15-inch large LCD using liquid crystal, and can display various effect images and games to the first start port 212 or the second start port 214. Triggered by the entrance of a sphere, the three symbol sequences in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are displayed in a variable manner, and each is stopped and displayed. The lottery result relating to the start prize to the start port 212 or the second start port 214 can be displayed (see FIGS. 37 to 40).

[Retention structure of retaining plate in game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a front view showing a relationship among a front component member, a holding plate, and a holding plate support frame in the game board. 18 is a cross-sectional side view in FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 17 in an exploded manner. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the holding plate support frame and the decoration unit.

  The holding plate support frame 244 is disposed at a position corresponding to the game area 37 and has a size that substantially includes the game area 37 in a front view, and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and protrudes into the through-hole 250. A plurality of protruding pieces 252 formed so as not to enter the game area 37 in a plan view, and protruding pins 254 respectively formed on three protruding pieces 252 in the present example among the plurality of protruding pieces 252 are provided. . The projecting pins 254 are formed so as to project forward from the upper projecting piece 252 and the left and right projecting pieces 252 (see FIG. 19).

  The holding plate support frame 244 further includes a plurality of locking claws 255 that can lock the holding plate 242 held in the through-hole 250 from the front side (see FIG. 19). When the holding plate 242 is inserted and fitted into the through-hole 250 from the front side, the locking claw 255 is elastically deformed and detachably locks and holds the holding plate 242.

  In addition, the holding plate support frame 244 has a plurality of recesses 256 that are open on the rear surface side. The recesses 256 are hollowed out from the rear surface side, and are held in comparison with the case where they are formed solid. The weight of the plate support frame 244 is greatly reduced (see FIGS. 18 and 20). Note that the holding plate support frame 244 of this example is formed of a predetermined resin material (for example, polypropylene, ABS resin, etc.). Further, the thickness W1 of the holding plate support frame 244 is about 20 mm, which is substantially the same as the thickness of the game board base in the conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, as shown in detail in FIG. 20, a plurality of mounting holes 258 arranged obliquely are formed on the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244 between the four corners and the through holes 250. The mounting holes 258 are formed at substantially the center of the bosses having a predetermined diameter, and the bosses are connected to each other by wall-shaped ribs, so that the bosses having the mounting holes 258 are not easily deformed. ing. That is, the mounting strength of the mounting hole 258 is increased. The attachment hole 258 is for attaching and fixing various members such as the decoration unit 240 and the substrate holder 91 that are attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244.

  The holding plate 242 has an outer peripheral shape substantially corresponding to the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 250 of the holding plate support frame 244, a fitting hole 260 that fits the upper protruding pin 254 in the holding plate support frame 244, and the holding plate The left and right protruding pins 254 in the support frame 244 are inserted, and a long hole 262 extending in the vertical direction is provided. The holding plate 242 is formed of a transparent resin plate obtained by extruding a transparent resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, acrylic resin, or methacrylic resin. Further, the thickness W2 of the holding plate 242 is set to a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail to be placed, and the thickness of the holding plate support frame 244. The thickness is approximately half of W1.

  Further, the holding plate 242 is formed with an engaging step portion 264 that engages with the locking claw 255 of the holding plate support frame 244 on the outer periphery thereof so as to correspond to each locking claw 255. The engagement step portion 264 is configured such that the front side of the holding plate 242 is depressed (see FIG. 19). The holding plate 242 is provided with a plurality of openings 266 that hold the central accessory 200, the gate 204, the winning a prize opening unit 234, etc. in predetermined positions and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A central accessory 200 or the like is inserted into the opening 266 from the front side of the opening 266.

  In this game board 5, the holding plate support frame 244 is configured from the front to the holding plate support frame 244 with the holding plate 242 inserted into the frame-shaped holding plate support frame 244, that is, in the through hole 250 of the holding plate support frame 244. By fixing the member 79, the holding plate 242 is sandwiched between the protruding pieces 252 of the holding plate support frame 244 and the front component member 79. That is, the rear surface side of the holding plate 242 is in contact with the protruding piece 252, and the front side of the holding plate 242 is in contact with the front component member 79, so that the protruding piece 252 and the front component member 79 are sandwiched.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in this example, the front surface of the holding plate 242 and the front surface of the holding plate support frame 244 are arranged so as to be substantially flush with each other. In other words, the front surface position of the protruding piece 252 of the holding plate support frame 244 is arranged at a position where the front surface of the holding plate 242 and the holding plate support frame 244 is substantially flush with the thickness W2 of the holding plate 242. Yes. As a result, there is no step in the front-rear direction between the holding plate support frame 244 and the holding plate 242.

  Further, the holding plate 242 and the holding plate support frame 244 are arranged such that when the holding plate 242 is inserted into the through-hole 250, the protruding pin 254 on the upper side of the holding plate support frame 244 is fitted into the fitting hole 260 of the base body. At the same time, the left and right protruding pins 254 of the holding plate support frame 244 are inserted into the left and right elongated holes 262 of the holding plate 242, respectively, fixed in the fitting hole 260 so as not to move, and fixed in the elongated hole 262 so as to be movable. It has come to be.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a predetermined amount of clearance (gap) is formed between the inner periphery of the through hole 250 in the holding plate support frame 244 and the outer periphery of the holding plate 242. The relative expansion and contraction of the holding plate 242 and the holding plate support frame 244 due to temperature changes such as the air temperature and the environmental temperature of the pachinko machine 1 and changes with time is allowed, so that the holding plate 242 and the like can be prevented from being distorted. It has become.

  In addition, the holding plate 242 and the holding plate support frame 244 of this example are fitted and inserted into the through hole 250 of the holding plate support frame 244 from the front, and the locking claw 255 and the engagement step portion 264 are inserted. , The holding plate 242 can be held by the holding plate support frame 244, and the front side of the holding plate 242 and the holding plate support frame 244 is substantially flush with each other. This makes it possible to set a conventional nail planting device in a state where the holding plate 242 is held on the holding plate support frame 244 without modifying the existing nail planting device. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the game board 5 having the game area 37 is divided into the holding plate 242, the holding plate support frame 244, and the front component member 79, depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1, the obstacle nail 230, the winning opening, etc. The holding plate 242 whose position changes can be used as a replacement part, and the holding plate support frame 244 and the front component member 79 can be used as common parts, and the holding plate support frame 244 and the front component member 79 can be recycled. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a game board 5 that can be used for various types of machines by replacing only the holding plate 242.

  Further, since the holding plate support frame 244 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 258 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the decoration unit 240, the substrate holder 91, and the like that are attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244 according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members are different positions, the holding plate support frame 244 can be made to be a model-independent pachinko by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 258. The common parts of the machine 1 can be used.

[About the structure of the central character in the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 (A) is a front view of the central accessory, and FIG. 21 (B) is a rear view of the central accessory shown with the partition plate removed. FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing the central accessory obliquely from the upper right. FIG. 23 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of an attacker device provided in the central accessory.

  The central character 200 in this example has a size that occupies more than two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37 (see FIG. 9 and the like), and the effect display device 202 arranged on the rear side is a player. A substantially rectangular opening 268 is provided so as to be visible. The central accessory 200 is formed in a frame shape by the opening 268, and the front side is shaped like a rock over the entire circumference.

  An attacker device 270 is disposed on the upper edge of the central accessory 200. The attacker device 270 has a pair of a winning hole 272 through which a game ball can be inserted and a pair of doors that can open and close the winning box 272. The opening / closing member 274 and an attacker solenoid 276 (see FIG. 23) for opening / closing the opening / closing member 274 are configured. In addition, the attacker device 270 is provided with a count sensor 278 that counts the game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 272, and a predetermined number (for example, 13) is detected by the count sensor 278 detecting the game balls. The game balls are paid out. The attacker device 270 is further provided with a delivery port 279 for delivering the game ball detected by the count sensor 278 to the decoration unit 240 disposed on the rear side of the central accessory 200 (FIG. 21). (See (B) etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 23, the attacker device 270 includes a rotating shaft 280 having one end fixed at a predetermined position of the opening / closing member 274 and a shaft fixed to the other end of the rotating shaft 280 and offset from the axis of the rotating shaft 280. An attacker solenoid 276 having a rotation link member 284 having a transmission pin 282 at the centered position, and a transmission hole 286 having a long hole shape through which the transmission pin 282 of the rotation link member 284 is inserted and slidable in a substantially horizontal direction. And a link member 288 that moves in the up-down direction when driven by.

  The rotation shaft 280 is disposed at a position away from each other below the pair of opening / closing members 274 with respect to the pair of opening / closing members 274, and is transmitted by the rotation link member 284 fixed to the other end side of the rotation shaft 280. The pins 282 are arranged at positions eccentric from the rotary shaft 280 in directions approaching each other. As shown in the figure, when the pair of opening / closing members 274 are in a closed state, the rotation link member 284 is fixed to the rotation shaft 280 so that the rotation shaft 280 and the transmission pin 282 are aligned in a substantially horizontal direction.

  In this attacker device 270, a pair of opening and closing members 274 are driven by independent attacker solenoids 276. When the link member 288 is raised by the attacker solenoid 276, the upper ends of the pair of opening and closing members 274 are separated from each other. It becomes a state (see FIG. 21A), and it becomes an open state in which a game ball can enter the special winning opening 272. On the other hand, when the link member 288 is lowered, the upper ends of the pair of opening / closing members 274 come close to each other (see FIG. 23 and the like), and the game ball enters a closed state where the game ball cannot enter the winning prize opening 272.

  In this example, as shown in the figure, the pair of opening / closing members 274 in the attacker device 270 are shaped in a shape resembling a wooden sign on the front side, so that they open and close in the left and right in a conventional gaming machine. It has a different form from the variable winning ball device (so-called electric tulip), and attracts the player's interest by a different form of the attacker device.

  Further, in this example, the link member 288 is driven to rise by energizing the attacker solenoid 276, and when not energized, the pair of opening / closing members is caused by the weight of the opening / closing member 274 and the plunger of the attacker solenoid 276, etc. 274 is automatically closed, and prevents the attacker device 270 from being kept open due to a malfunction of the attacker solenoid 276 or the like.

  As will be described in detail later, the attacking device 270 of this example extracts (lottery) a random number for winning determination when a game ball enters the first starting port 212 or the second starting port 214, and the hit determining random number is If “hit” such as “2R big hit”, “15R big hit” and “small hit” is suggested, the opening / closing member 274 performs a predetermined opening / closing operation according to the “hit”.

  Here, “winning” means that the opening / closing member 274 of the attacker device 270 is opened, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning opening 272 during that time, or the opening / closing member 274 is closed when a predetermined time elapses. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 274 is repeated a plurality of times to make it easier for the game ball to enter the grand prize winning opening 272 and to pay out more game balls. This opening / closing operation is called one round.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the case of “15R big hit”, as a predetermined number, for example, 10 game balls enter the big winning opening 272 when the opening / closing member 231 is in the open state, or as a predetermined time For example, when 30 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing member 274 is closed as one round, and the round is repeated 15 times. Further, in the case of “2R big hit”, when, for example, 10 game balls enter the predetermined winning opening 272 as the predetermined number when the opening / closing member 231 is open, or for example, 1.3 seconds elapses as the predetermined time. The opening / closing member 274 is closed as one round, and the round is repeated twice. In comparison with “15R big hit”, “2R big hit” is less likely to enter the big winning opening 272, and game balls are less paid out.

  In this example, for “2R big hit” and “15R big hit”, the probability that “2R big hit” and “15R big hit” are lottery is changed to a higher probability than the normal probability from the next lottery. 2R probability variation big hit "and" 15R probability variation big hit ". In this example, when the probability at normal time is “1 / 319.25”, the probability of the high probability state at the time of probability change is “1 / 31.925”.

  In addition to the attacker device 270, a guide shelf 289 for guiding the game balls supplied to the upper side of the central actor 200 to the left and right of the central actor 200 is provided on the upper edge of the central actor 200. The guide shelf 289 guides the game ball flowing down to the left side from the attacker device 270 to the left side of the central player 200 and the game ball flowing down to the right side of the attacker device 270 to the right side of the central player 200, respectively. ing. Note that in this example, the game ball hardly flows to the right side of the attacker device 270.

  In the central accessory 200, a warp port 290 that opens to the outer peripheral side at an upper portion of the left edge portion thereof, and a game ball that has entered the warp port 290 are moved downward substantially vertically along the inner periphery of the central accessory 200. A warp guiding path 292 for guiding, and a stage 294 arranged on the inner peripheral side (upper surface side) of the lower edge portion of the central accessory 200 so that the game medium guided by the warp guiding path 292 can roll in the left-right direction. Is further provided. As shown in the figure, the stage 294 has a curved surface in which the portion directly above the first starting port 212 is the lowest, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the central actor 200 in the game region 37 is warped 290. When the ball enters the ball, it is sent onto the stage 294 via the warp guide path 292 so that the game ball can be released to the first start port 212 and the second start port 214 with high probability. It has become.

  Further, the central player 200 includes an edge guide path 296 that guides the game ball flowing down to the right side of the attacker device 270 along the right edge of the central player 200 in a state in which the player cannot see the game ball. First start by rolling a position different from the stage 294 on the inner peripheral side (upper surface side) of the lower edge of the central accessory 200 in a state where the game ball guided by the head guide path 296 is visible to the player A lower edge rolling portion 298 that discharges downstream so as not to enter the mouth 212 is further provided.

  In this example, the warp guide path 292, the stage 294, and the lower edge rolling portion 298 are made of a transparent member, so that the game balls that roll and circulate can be visually recognized, and are arranged on the rear side. The unit 240, the effect display device 202, etc. can be visually recognized.

  Further, the central accessory 200 further includes a transparent plate-like partition plate 300 attached to the rear side so as to close the opening 268, and the partition plate 300 enables the stage 294 and the lower edge rolling portion. The game ball rolling on 298 is prevented from flowing out to the rear side of the central accessory 200. Further, the partition plate 300 separates and separates the game area 37 and the space behind the central character 200.

  Further, the central character 200 is further provided with a special symbol display 302, a special symbol hold indicator 304, and a status indicator 306 at the lower part of the lower edge thereof. The symbol display 302 and the special symbol hold display 304 are each composed of four LEDs, and the status indicator 306 is constituted by one LED.

[Composition of decoration unit on game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a front view of the decoration unit. FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the decorative unit obliquely from the front. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit in an exploded manner for each main constituent member. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structural members that mainly constitute the effect space in an exploded manner. FIG. 28A is a perspective view showing the effect unit, and FIG. 28B is a perspective view of the effect unit shown from a direction different from FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view showing the distribution device in the effect unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the sorting apparatus shown from a direction different from FIG. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting operation in the sorting apparatus. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting operation in the sorting apparatus continued from FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the decorative unit obliquely from the rear with the unit support member removed. FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing a part of the decorative body together with a part of the effect unit from the rear.

  As described above, the decoration unit 240 of this example is disposed on the rear side of the holding plate 242 and the holding plate support frame 244 provided with the obstacle nail 230 and the like on the front side, and is independent of the game area 37. An effect space 310 having a game ball effect space 308 in which a game ball that is made into a space and entered the big prize opening 272 of the attacker device 270 can be distributed, and a plurality of decorative bodies arranged on the outer periphery of the effect space 310 312, a light emitting means 314 (see FIG. 36) that is disposed on the rear side of the decorative body 312 and can emit light forward, and is disposed between the light emitting means 314 and the decorative body 312 to diffuse light from the light emitting means 314. A diffusion decoration member 316 to be given, an effect unit 318 capable of giving a predetermined effect operation to a game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening 272, at least a game ball effect space 308, an ornament 312, It means 314, and a diffusion decorative member 316, units are mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244 in a state of directing unit 318, and the effect display device 202 held in the respective predetermined positions supporting member 320.

  In the effect space 310 in the decoration unit 240, the front side is partitioned from the game area 37 by the holding plate 242 and the partition plate 300 of the central accessory 200, the outer periphery of the upper, lower, left, and right is the unit support member 320, and the rear side is the unit support member. The space is divided by 320 and the effect display device 202, and the depth is about 2 to 10 times the outer shape of the game ball. Various decoration bodies 312, light emitting means 314, diffusion decoration members 316, and an effect unit 318 are accommodated in the effect space 310.

  The decorative body 312 is composed of a plurality of members, and is arranged along the outer peripheral portion of the effect space 310, so that it has a frame shape as a whole, and the effect display device 202 arranged on the rear side through the frame plays a game. It is visible from the person. As shown in FIG. 24 and the like, these decorative bodies 312 are arranged at the upper left and have a logo decorative body 312a in which the characters “professional golfer monkey” are formed, and a background decorative body 312b that is placed on the left side of the gate 204 and imitates a rock. The background decoration body 312c, which is arranged on the left and right ends of the winning opening unit 234 and the upper side of the logo decoration body 312a, and which embodies splash, and the logo decoration body 312a are arranged on the lower right on the diagonal line and are similar to a golf ball. A decorative body 312d is provided.

  In addition, the decorative body 312 is disposed behind the logo decorative body 312a and the background decorative bodies 312b and 312c, and is substantially transparent, and represents the flow of water so as to continue from the upper side to the lower side of the rendering unit 318. It further has a flowing water pattern-like background decoration body 312e. That is, the background decoration body 312e represents water flowing toward the character decoration body 312d that imitates a golf ball. In this example, the logo decoration body 312a is vertically divided. A background decoration body 312f simulating a rock is arranged on the rear side of the effect unit 318 from the left inner periphery to the lower inner periphery of the background decoration body 312e. The decorative body 312 is further disposed on the upper lower side of the effect unit 318 and on the right inner side of the decorative unit 240, and further includes background decorative bodies 312g and 312h simulating rocks, respectively.

  Furthermore, the decorative body 312 further includes a background decorative body 312i that is arranged on the opposite side of the logo decorative body 312a around the center in the left-right direction of the decorative unit 240, that is, at the upper right of the decorative unit 240 and imitates a rock. . The background decoration body 312i is provided with a normal symbol display 322 made up of two LEDs and a normal symbol holding display 324 also made up of two LEDs.

  The background decorative bodies 312b, 312f, 312g, and 312h simulating rocks in the decorative body 312 of this example are configured by members having low translucency, and the background decorative bodies 312f, 312g, and 312h having low translucency are used. The outer periphery of the effect display device 202 is surrounded. This prevents the light from the light emitting means 314 from being applied to the effect display device 202 via the background decorative bodies 312f, 312g, and 312h, making it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the effect display device 202. In addition, the display of the effect display device 202 is separated from the light emitting decoration by the decorative body 312 arranged around the effect display device 202 so that the effect image of the effect display device 202 stands out. Yes.

  In addition, the background decorative body 312c, in which the splash in the decorative body 312 is embodied, is a member with reduced translucency, and the whole light emission decoration by the light emitting means 314 is suppressed, and the accent by the light emission decoration is suppressed. Is added to enhance the decorative effect.

  The light emitting means 314 is disposed on the rear side of the decorative body 312 and a specific configuration is not illustrated, but includes a plurality of LEDs that can emit light in an arbitrary color and an LED substrate that holds the plurality of LEDs. Depending on the gaming situation, it can be made to emit light in a predetermined color, blink, or turn on in gradation. For example, light emission arranged on the back side of the background decorative body 312e having a flowing water pattern Each LED of the means 314 is turned on and off sequentially from the upper side to the lower side (character decoration body 312d), so that a light flow can be produced by creating a flow of light.

  The diffusion decoration member 316 is disposed on the front side of the light emitting means 314 disposed mainly on the back side of the flowing water pattern-like background decoration body 312e, and has a polyhedral shape with a fine surface as shown in the figure. It diffuses so that the optical axis of the LED in the light emitting means 314 arranged on the rear side does not directly touch the eyes of the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the glare with respect to a player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the indirect light from the member arranged on the rear side is also diffused by the diffusion decoration member 316, it is difficult for the player to see the rear side of the diffusion decoration member 316, and the board arranged on the rear side Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of a member such as the design property.

  Note that the decorative body 312 and the diffusion decorative member 316 are basically made of a light-transmitting member, and the front surface moves away from the player (goes to the rear side) from the outer peripheral side of the decorative unit 240 toward the center. It is formed as follows. As a result, the outer peripheral side of the decoration unit 240 is arranged in front of the player, and the center side is arranged in the rear of the player. The pachinko machine 1 has an unprecedented sense of depth.

  The game ball effect space 308 is substantially the same space as the space defined by the background decorative bodies 312f, 312g, and 312h when viewed from the front.

  Next, the effect unit 318 in the decoration unit 240 will be described. The production unit 318 of this example is arranged on the rear side of the attacker device 270 in the central object 200, accepts a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 272 of the attacker device 270, and is in one of four directions. A sorting device 330 capable of sorting is provided (see FIG. 28).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the distribution device 330 communicates with a guide passage 332 and a guide passage 332 that extend in an annular shape around an axis that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball and extends in the vertical direction. The intruder 334 that can enter the winning prize opening 272 in the attacker device 270 and can enter the game ball detected by the count sensor 278, and sequentially enter the clockwise direction in plan view along the circumferential direction of the guide passage 332 from the intrusion port 334. The first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, the third distribution port 340, and the first distribution port 336 that are arranged and through which the game balls can pass are separated from the opposite side across the intrusion port 334. A distribution base member 344 having a communication passage 342 that communicates between the distribution opening 338 and the third distribution opening 340 so as to short-circuit the guide passage 332, and is rotatably held around the axis of the distribution base member 344. The A game ball housing portion 346 (FIG. 30) that can communicate with any one of the entry port 334, the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, the third distribution port 340, and the communication passage 342 depending on the rotation angle. A rotating body 348 provided with a reference), a sorting motor 350 that rotates the rotating body 348, and a sorting cover member 352 that holds the sorting motor 350 in a predetermined position and covers the upper side of the sorting base member 344. I have.

  The distribution base member 344 in the distribution device 330 has an annular guide passage 332 disposed at the right end in the left-right direction of the distribution device 330 and has an outer peripheral diameter of 3 with respect to the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter is ˜5 times (see FIGS. 31 and 32). Further, the outer diameter of the rotating body 348 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the guide passage 332, and is smaller than the diameter of the rotating body used in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the sorting apparatus 330 of this example has a small depth in the front-rear direction and a long form in the left-right direction.

  In this example, the circumferential positional relationship of the intrusion port 334, the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, the third distribution port 340, and the communication passage 342 is the same as that of the first distribution port 336. The center is arranged at a position moved about 45 ° in a clockwise direction in plan view with respect to the center of the entry port 334, and the center of the second distribution port 338 is about the center of the first distribution port 336. Position where the center of the third distribution port 340 is moved about 60 ° further in the clockwise direction in plan view than the center of the second distribution port 338. Is arranged. Further, the center of the communication passage 342 is disposed at a position passing through the centers of the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340. Specifically, the center of the communication passage 342 is located with respect to the center of the second distribution port 338. It is arranged at a position moved in a clockwise direction about 30 ° in plan view. That is, the center of the communication passage 342 is arranged at a position moved about 65 ° counterclockwise in plan view with respect to the center of the entrance 334. The center line of the communication passage 342 is arranged so as to face the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1.

  The distribution base member 344 has an intrusion receiving port 354 that is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction with respect to the game area 37 and opens to the front side so as to face the transfer port 279 of the attacker device 270 and can communicate with the intrusion port 334. Is provided. The intrusion entrance 354 is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction with respect to the game area 37.

  The distribution base member 344 communicates with the intrusion receiving port 354 and the intrusion port 334 of the guide passage 332 and extends in the left-right direction and has a predetermined number (for example, five balls (including the guide passage 332 and six balls)). A storage passage 356 that can store the game balls is further provided. The storage passage 356 is inclined so as to become lower toward the intrusion port 334, and the game ball received in the intrusion receiving port 354 is rolled by gravity and sent to the intrusion port 334.

  The distribution base member 344 discharges the game balls that have been received in the intrusion receiving port 354 but not stored in the storage passage 356 to the outside without returning them to the game ball effect space 308 or the game area 37. The discharge passage 358 is further provided. As shown in the drawing, the discharge passage 358 is a passage extending from the intrusion receiving port 354 in the left direction opposite to the storage passage 356, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left end. When the game ball is received in the intrusion entrance 354 in a state where the game ball is stored in the storage passage 356 to the vicinity of the intrusion entrance 354, the game ball that has lost its place to the storage passage 356 is naturally discharged. , And rolls in the discharge passage 358 and is discharged from the left end of the sorting base member 344.

  As shown in the figure, the distribution base member 344 is arranged such that the intrusion port 334 and the first distribution port 336 open to the outer periphery of the guide passage 332, and the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port are arranged. The mouth 340 is a through hole that opens on the guide passage 332.

  In addition, the distribution base member 344 is disposed on the guide passage 332 so as to be lowered toward the first distribution port 336 on the guide passage 332, and on the rear side of the storage passage 356, and is disposed on the first distribution port. A first distribution passage 362 is provided which extends from 336 to the left of the intrusion port 334 and allows game balls distributed to the first distribution port 336 to roll. The first distribution passage 362 is formed so as to become lower toward the left direction, and an opening 364 for delivering a game ball to the lower side of the distribution base member 344 is formed at the left end thereof. (See FIG. 30).

  Furthermore, the distribution base member 344 includes an inner peripheral wall 366 that prevents the game ball of the guide passage 332 from moving in the axial direction (the inner peripheral side of the guide passage 332) at least at the position where the entry port 334 is disposed. ing. In this example, the communication passage 342 is formed so as to penetrate the inner peripheral wall 366, and the communication passage 342 is inclined so as to become lower toward the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340. is doing.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the rotating body 348 in the sorting apparatus 330 has a game ball housing portion 346 that extends in the diameter direction through the center of the rotating body 348 and has one end side (one end side of the outer periphery of the rotating body 348). The lower side is open. The game ball housing portion 346 has a width that is substantially the same as the width of the guide passage 332 so that a game ball can be distributed. In this example, the inner peripheral wall 366 of the sorting base member 344 can be housed in the game ball housing portion 346 of the rotating body 348.

  The rotating body 348 includes a barrier portion 368 that prevents the game ball from passing through the entry port 334 when the game ball housing portion 346 and the entry port 334 of the sorting base member 344 are in a rotational position where they do not communicate with each other. . By this barrier portion 368, the rotating body 348 has a cylindrical shape in which one end of the game ball housing portion 346 is opened on the outer periphery. In addition, the rotating body 348 is disposed on the upper side of the game ball housing portion 346 and the barrier portion 368, and has a cylindrical detection portion having a smaller diameter than the barrier portion 368 and having a notched slit 370 at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction. 372 and a shaft portion 376 that is arranged to extend upward at the center of the rotating body 348 and can be connected to the drive shaft 374 of the sorting motor 350.

  The sorting cover member 352 in the sorting device 330 has a motor fixing portion 378 for fixing and holding the sorting motor 350 and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft 374 of the sorting motor 350 fixed to the motor fixing portion 378 can pass. 380. In this example, the sorting motor 350 is fixed to the motor fixing portion 378 using a predetermined screw on the top of the sorting cover member 352.

  Further, the sorting apparatus 330 of this example includes an intrusion detection sensor 382 that is disposed on the storage passage 356 and can detect a game ball that enters the intrusion port 334, and the intrusion detection sensor 382 includes a sorting base member. It is fixed by being pinched by 344 and the distribution cover member 352. The sorting device 330 further includes a rotational position detection sensor 384 for detecting the rotational position of the rotating body 348 that is rotationally driven by the sorting motor 350, and the sensor fixing unit 386 of the sorting cover member 352 has a sensor fixing portion 386. The rotation position of the rotating body 348 is detected by detecting the slit 370 that is fixed and formed in the detection unit 372 of the rotating body 348. In this example, the rotational position detection sensor 384 detects the slit 370 of the detection unit 372 when the game ball housing part 346 of the rotating body 348 is in the rotational position communicating with the entry port 334. It becomes the original position of the body 348 (see FIG. 31A).

  Further, the sorting device 330 is arranged and fixed below the sorting base member 344, and discharges the game balls distributed to the first sorting port 336 downward from the left end front side of the sorting device 330. The game balls distributed to 388 and the second distribution port 338 are released downward from the substantially central front side of the distribution device 330 at the approximate center in the left-right direction with respect to the game area 37 and are distributed to the third distribution port 340. And a second release member 390 for releasing the game ball from the right end front side of the sorting device 330 downward. The first release member 388 and the second release member 390 are formed of a transparent resin so that the released game ball can be visually recognized from the outside.

  The first discharge member 388 includes a first discharge receiving portion 392 that receives a game ball from the opening 364 of the first distribution passage 362, and a game ball received by the first discharge reception portion 392 at the left end of the distribution device 330. A first discharge guiding path 394 for guiding to the front side, and a first discharge section 396 made of a croon that can be rotated and released downward after rotating the game ball guided by the first discharge guiding path 394 in a spiral shape. ing. The first discharge guiding path 394 is inclined so as to become lower toward the first discharge portion 396.

  Further, the second release member 390 receives a game ball falling from the second distribution port 338 of the distribution base member 344, and distributes the game ball received by the second release reception unit 398. A second discharge guide path 400 that guides the game area 37 substantially to the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the center of the minute device 330, and a game ball guided by the second release guide path 400 are rotated in a spiral shape. A second discharge portion 402 composed of a croon that can be dropped and released downward; a third discharge reception portion 404 that receives a game ball falling from the third distribution port 340 of the distribution base member 344; and a third discharge reception portion 404 A third discharge guide path 406 that guides the received game ball to the right end front side of the sorting device 330, and a game ball guided by the third release guide path 406 can be rotated downward and released downward. Made up of crunch And a three-emitting portion 408. In addition, the 2nd discharge | release guide path 400 and the 3rd discharge | release guide path 406 are inclined so that it may become low toward the 2nd discharge | release part 402 and the 3rd discharge | release part 408, respectively.

  The distribution device 330 of the present example is generally disposed above the upper end of the effect display device 202, and the first emission unit 396, the second emission unit 402, and the third emission unit 408 are included in the effect display device 202. It is arranged at the same height as the upper end. In addition, the 1st discharge | release member 388 and the 2nd discharge | release member 390 are the states concealed by the background decoration body 312g except for the 1st discharge | release part 396, the 2nd discharge | release part 402, and the 3rd discharge | release part 408 ( (See FIG. 24 etc.)

  In addition to the sorting device 330, the rendering unit 318 of this example is arranged at a position deviated from the center in the left-right direction to the left with respect to the game area 37 below the gaming ball rendering space 308. A first receiving port 410 (see FIG. 28, etc.) in which game balls distributed to any of the distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340 can be received; The second receiving port 412 that receives the game balls that are distributed to any of the first distributing port 336, the second distributing port 338, and the third distributing port 340 by 330 and not received by the first receiving port 410 (FIG. 27, FIG. 34, FIG. 35, etc.).

  In addition, the production unit 318 is arranged at a position below the center of the game ball production space 308 that is biased to the left of the center, and the rolling receiving stage 414 having a first receiving port 410 opened in the vicinity of the lower part and formed in a curved shape. And a central stage 416 arranged on the right side of the rolling receiving stage 414 and vertically below the second discharge part 402 and slightly higher than the first receiving port 410, and from the central stage 416 to the rolling receiving stage 414. A guidance guidance stage 418 capable of guiding and guiding the game ball, a rebound flight stage 420 at least a part of which is located on the left side of the central stage 416 and vertically below the third discharge part 408, a rolling stage 414, a center A collection stage 422 (see FIG. 34, etc.) that is arranged below the stage 416, the guidance and guidance stage 418, and the rebound flight stage 420 and that has a second receiving opening 412 that is open at the bottom and is curved. Device 3 A game ball released from the first release unit 396 of 0 is received and guided to roll to the rebound flight stage 420 so that it passes above the collection stage 422 and below the rolling stage 414 and the central stage 416. And a rolling guide member 424.

  The first receiving port 410 in the effect unit 318 is arranged on the rolling receiving stage 414 in the lower part of the game ball effect space 308, and is arranged at a position that is very conspicuous from the player as shown in the figure. On the other hand, the second receiving port 412 is arranged at a position that is hardly visible to the player, and the first receiving port 410 has a special meaning in the game ball effect space 308. The player can recognize this.

  The rolling receiving stage 414 has a first receiving port 410 disposed behind the center in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a curved shape such that the left side is higher than the first receiving port 410. In this rolling receiving stage 414, a weir part that guides a game ball rolling from the left end toward the first receiving opening 410 on the left side of the first receiving opening 410 to the front side of the center of the rolling receiving stage 414 in the front-rear direction. 426 and an anti-upward portion 428 that goes up on the right side of the first receiving port 410 toward the right side of the front side of the front-rear direction. A central stage 416 is developed on the right side extension of the anti-upward portion 428.

  In this rolling receiving stage 414, the game ball supplied to the upper side (left side) of the weir part 426 is guided to the anti-upward part 428 by the weir part 426, and is supplied to the anti-upward part 428. Depending on the rolling speed of the game ball, it is possible that the game ball jumps out of the uphill portion 428 and falls onto the central stage 416. Note that the game balls that have not jumped out from the anti-upward portion 428 roll on the rolling receiving stage 414 in the direction of the first receiving port 410.

  The central stage 416 is provided with a low resilience member on the upper surface thereof so that the game balls falling from the second discharge part 402 can be received with little repulsion, and the upper surface of the central stage 416 is guided by the guidance. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the stage 418, so that the game balls released from the second release unit 402 are received without being repelled and delivered to the guidance guidance stage 418. Low resilience members include “viscoelastic rubber and resin”, “foamed rubber and resin”, “encapsulated liquid and viscous fluid”, “encapsulated gel-like substance” , “Powder or granule encapsulated”, “nonwoven fabric”, “moquette”, “pile woven or piled material”, etc. can be used. “Honeynite (registered trademark)” is used.

  The guide guidance stage 418 is arranged so as to connect the rear side in the front-rear direction of the central stage 416 and the rolling receiving stage 414, and is formed in a bridge shape whose width is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. . The guidance guidance stage 418 is formed with a branching portion 430 that is notched so as to expand toward the front side at the boundary with the rolling reception stage 414. Depending on the position in the front-rear direction, the rolling speed of the game ball, and the like, the game ball guided and guided by the branching unit 430 is not the direction of the rolling receiving stage 414 but the outside of the guidance guide stage 418, that is, the guidance guidance stage 418. It is guided and guided to a collection stage 422 disposed below.

  In this example, the game balls released from the second discharge unit 402 and received by the central stage 416 are received with a high probability through the guide guidance stage 418 into the first receiving port 410 of the rolling receiving stage 414. It is like that.

  The rolling guide member 424 is made of a transparent resin member, and receives a game ball released from the first discharge unit 396 of the sorting device 330, and plays the game ball received by the receiver 432 as a game ball effect. A rolling guide rail that guides in a substantially vertical direction along the left end of the space 308, guides a curve with a predetermined curvature, and rolls and guides the guide so that it is guided in a substantially horizontal right direction below the central stage 416. 434, and a discharge port 436 that discharges the game ball that has been rolling guided to the right end of the rolling guide rail 434 in a substantially horizontal right direction. In this example, the game ball is discharged from the discharge port 436 in a direction slightly upward from the horizontal direction.

  The rebound flight stage 420 is a first rebound flight section in which the game ball released from the discharge port 436 of the rolling guide member 424 can fly over the central stage 416 and rebound to the rolling receiving stage 414. 438 and a game ball released from the third discharge portion 408 that is arranged on the right side of the first release flight portion 438 and substantially perpendicular to the third discharge portion 408 in the direction in which the first receiving port 410 is arranged. And a second repulsion flight unit 440 that is made possible. These first repulsion flight part 438 and second repulsion flight part are configured by a high repulsion member that can repel and fly a game ball that collides at a predetermined speed with a high elastic repulsion force. Elastic members such as rubber and springs (made of metal, resin, etc.) can be used as appropriate. In this example, a highly repulsive resin is used.

  As shown in the drawing, the first repulsion flying portion 438 is an inclined surface (first inclined surface) whose right end rises high. As a result, the game ball released from the discharge port 436 of the rolling guide member 424 jumps over the upper side of the central stage 416 so as to be folded and is received by the rolling receiving stage 414 and released from the second discharge unit 402. The game balls received by the central stage 416 are received at the first receiving port 410 with a lower probability than the probability that they are received at the first receiving port 410.

  The second repulsion flying portion 440 includes an inclined surface (second inclined surface) whose left end is slightly lowered, and a curved surface portion that smoothly connects the left end of the inclined surface and the right end of the first repulsive flying portion 438. ing. As a result, the game ball released from the third release portion 408 collides with either the inclined surface or the curved surface portion of the second rebound flight portion 440 and rebounds and flies in the left direction where the first receiving port 410 is located. Thus, the first receptive flight unit 438 can accept the first receptive flight 410 with a lower probability than when the repelled flight is performed.

  The effect unit 318 can detect a first reception detection sensor 442 (see FIG. 35) capable of detecting a game ball received in the first reception port 410 and a game ball received in the second reception port 412. A second acceptance detection sensor 444 (see FIG. 34) is further provided. The second acceptance detection sensor 444 is supported by the unit support member 320, details of which will be described later.

  A recovery stage 422 is arranged downstream of the first receiving port 410 as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, and the game ball received in the first receiving port 410 is moved to the first receiving detection sensor 442. After being detected at, it is sent to the collection stage 422 and detected again by the second reception detection sensor 444 via the second reception port 412. That is, when a game ball is received in the first receiving port 410, it is detected by both the first receiving detection sensor 442 and the second receiving detection sensor 444, and the game ball is not received in the first receiving port 410. Is detected only by the second acceptance detection sensor 444.

  Next, the unit support member 320 in the decoration unit 240 will be described. The unit support member 320 has an effect space 310 that can accommodate the decorative bodies 312, the light emitting means 314, the diffusion decoration member 316, the effect unit 318, and the like, and can hold them in a predetermined position. As shown in FIG. 26, the unit support member 320 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the holding plate 242 that holds the obstacle nail 230 and the like. The back plate portion 454 that closes the rear opening of the portion 450 and has a rectangular opening window 452 that is substantially the same size as the effect display device 202, and is arranged at the four outer corners of the outer cover portion 450 and extends outward. And a flange-like mounting and fixing portion 458 having a plurality of insertion holes 456.

  The attachment fixing portions 458 in the unit support member 320 are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners where the attachment holes 258 are arranged on the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244, and the insertion holes 456 are formed in the attachment holes 258. The size is such that a predetermined screw to be screwed can be inserted. By attaching and fixing the attachment fixing portion 458 to the attachment hole 258 of the holding plate support frame 244 via a predetermined screw, the unit support member 320 is attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the holding plate support frame 244. ing.

  The unit support member 320 further includes an effect ball discharge passage 460 for discharging the game balls supplied into the game ball effect space 308 to the outside without returning them to the game area 37. The effect ball discharge passage 460 is collected by the collection stage 422 after the game balls distributed into the game ball effect space 308 by the distribution device 330 in the effect unit 318 are collected, and is collected by the second receiving entrance 412. The game balls accepted by the player are discharged. In the present example, a second reception detection sensor 444 is disposed in the middle of the effect ball discharge passage 460 (see FIG. 33).

  As shown in FIG. 33, the decoration unit 240 of this example receives the game balls distributed to the discharge passage 358 by the distribution device 330 and guides and discharges them below the game board 5 without returning them to the game area 37. A guide discharge passage 462 is provided. The guide discharge passage 462 is disposed on the left side of the background decoration body 312f so as to be substantially along the left end of the effect display device 202 in a front view, and a game ball circulating in the guide discharge passage 462 cannot be visually recognized by the player. It is like that.

  The guide discharge passage 462 is formed so as to extend substantially vertically in a portion along the left end of the effect display device 202, and a plurality of protrusions 464 as speed suppressing means are alternately formed on the left and right inner wall surfaces of the vertical portion. Is formed. In the guide discharge passage 462, the game balls come into contact with the plurality of alternately arranged protrusions 464, so that an increase in the flow speed of the game balls can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent circulation at a speed higher than a predetermined level and prevent various members arranged on the downstream side from being damaged by a collision of game balls.

  In addition, the guide discharge passage 462 is configured so that the game ball flows down substantially vertically in most of the portion, so that the guide ball discharges the game ball from the upper side of the game ball effect space 308 to the lower side of the game board 5. The proportion of the passage 462 can be reduced as much as possible, so that the guide discharge passage 462 does not interfere with other members.

  A part of the guide discharge passage 462 of this example is configured by a background decorative body 312 f and a unit support member 320. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the inner wall on the right side is formed integrally with the background decorative body 312f in the portion of the guide discharge passage 462 formed substantially vertically on the left side of the background decorative body 312f. The left inner wall is formed on the unit support member 320. Further, a downstream guide discharge passage 462 is formed in the unit support member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the guide discharge passage 462 is provided with a guide discharge detection sensor 466 that is fixed to the unit support member 320 and can detect a game ball that circulates inside the guide discharge passage 462.

  By the way, the decoration body 312 and the diffusion decoration member 316 in the decoration unit 240 of this example are provided with the holding plate 242 such as the gate 204 and the prize opening unit 234 held by the holding plate 242 disposed on the front side of the decoration unit 240. The portions protruding rearward from the rear surface can be inserted, or the openings 470 and 472 that can pass the game balls that have entered the general winning port 224, the first starting port 212, and the second starting port 214 correspond to each other. It is formed (see FIGS. 26 and 35). Through the openings 470 and 472 formed in the decorative body 312 (background decorative body 312e) and the diffusion decorative member 316, the gate 204 and the portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the holding plate 242 in the prize opening unit 234 are inserted. Thus, the predetermined wiring cord connected to the gate 204 and the winning a prize opening unit 234 can be extended rearward, and the holding plate 242, the decoration body 312 and the diffusion decoration member 316 are made of transparent resin. Even if it comprises, the part which protruded rearward rather than the holding | maintenance board 242 of gate 204, winning prize opening unit 234, etc. can be made inconspicuous from a player.

  In the decoration unit 240 of this example, the rolling receiving stage 414 arranged at the lower part of the rendering unit 318 is green with the first receiving port 410 as a cup, and the central stage 416, the guidance guidance stage 418, and the rebound flight stage 420. Is a fairway, and the collection stage 422 is a bunker. In addition, background decoration bodies 312f, 312g, and 312h simulating rocks and a running water pattern-like background decoration body 312e are arranged so as to surround each stage 414, 416, 418, 420, and 422. And, by these, the diorama of the golf course surrounded by rocks and water is developed in the production space 310, allowing the player to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 at a glance, The expectation to the game by this pachinko machine 1 can be raised now.

  Next, a game ball effect operation by the effect unit 318 in the decoration unit 240 will be described in detail. First, when a pair of opening / closing members 274 of the attacker device 270 arranged in the game area 37 is in an open state (when a big hit gaming state described later), a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 272 of the attacker device 270 is Then, it is delivered via the delivery port 279 to the intrusion entrance 354 of the sorting device 330 in the rendering unit 318.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the game ball B delivered to the intrusion receiving port 354 of the sorting apparatus 330 is stored in the storage passage 356 unless a predetermined number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 356. To the entrance 334 of the guide passage 332. At that time, the game ball B is detected by the intrusion detection sensor 382 disposed in the storage passage 356. Then, as shown in the drawing, when the game ball housing portion 346 of the rotating body 348 is located at a rotational position communicating with the entry port 334 and there is no game ball B in the guide passage 332, the entry port 334 is moved from the storage passage 356. The game ball B is accommodated in the game ball accommodating portion 346 through the guide passage 332.

  At this time, an inner peripheral wall 366 is provided on the inner periphery of the guide passage 332, and the game ball B that has entered the guide passage 332 from the entrance 334 by the inner peripheral wall 366 enters the inner periphery of the guide passage 332. In addition to being prevented from moving, the width of the guide passage 332 and the game ball housing portion 346 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, so that only one game ball B is inserted from the entry port 334. It enters into the guide passage 332. That is, only one game ball B is stored in the game ball storage portion 346 of the rotating body 348.

  When the game ball B is distributed to the first distribution port 336 in a state where the game ball B is stored in the game ball storage unit 346, first, as shown in FIG. Is rotated about 45 ° in a clockwise direction in plan view, so that the game ball housing portion 346 and the first distribution port 336 communicate with each other. A guide inclined surface 360 that is lowered toward the first distribution port 336 is formed at a circumferential position on the guide passage 332 where the first distribution port 336 is opened. B naturally rolls toward the first distribution port 336, and the game balls B are distributed to the first distribution port 336. Then, the game balls B distributed to the first distribution port 336 are discharged downward from the first discharge portion 396 through the first distribution passage 362.

  On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the second distribution port 338 or the third distribution port 340 in a state where the game balls B are stored in the game ball storage portion 346 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4D, the rotating body 348 is rotated by about 65 ° counterclockwise in plan view, so that the game ball housing portion 346 and the communication passage 342 communicate with each other. The communication passage 342 is inclined so that the rear end portion where the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340 are disposed is lower than the front end portion thereof. The game ball B sent to the part naturally rolls toward the rear end. The communication passage 342 is formed so as to penetrate the inner peripheral wall 366 of the guide passage 332, and the front end is passed through the inside so that the game ball B short-circuits the annular guide passage 332. It can move to the rear end on the opposite side.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32D, the game ball B is moved to the rear end of the communication passage 342, that is, between the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340. . In this state, the game ball housing portion 346 of the rotator 348 is in a state of being in partial communication with the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340 respectively. The game balls B are not connected to the distribution ports 338 and 340, and the game balls B remain between the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340.

  From the state shown in FIG. 5D, the rotating body 348 is rotated by about 30 ° counterclockwise in plan view, so that the game ball housing portion 346 completely communicates with the second distribution port 338. In this state, the game balls B are distributed to the second distribution port 338, dropped through the second distribution port 338, and released downward through the second discharge unit 402 (see FIG. )reference). Also, from the state shown in FIG. 4D, the rotating body 348 is rotated by about 30 ° in the clockwise direction in plan view, so that the game ball housing portion 346 is completely communicated with the third distribution port 340. In this state, the game balls B are distributed to the third distribution port 340, fall through the third distribution port 340, and are released downward through the third discharge unit 408 (see FIG. )reference).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, since a cylindrical barrier portion 368 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotating body 348, the entrance 334 is closed by the barrier portion 368 when the rotating body 348 rotates. Thus, the game ball B in the storage passage 356 is prevented from passing through the entry port 334, and the game ball B can be retained in the storage passage 356.

  Further, when a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 356, the stored leftmost game balls B reach the vicinity of the intrusion entrance 354, and more game balls B Is received in the intrusion entrance 354, the received game ball B is positioned on the discharge passage 358 where the left side is lowered, and the left side of the discharge passage 358 rolls leftward and is discharged to the outside. Become.

  Next, the rendering operation of the game ball B on the downstream side of the sorting device 330 in the rendering unit 318 will be described.

  First, the game balls B distributed to the first distribution port 336 by the distribution device 330 are received in the tube-shaped rolling guide rail 434 (the rolling guide member 424) via the first discharge portion 396. Then, the left end of the game ball production space 308 is lowered at a stroke and sent to the lower side of the rolling stage 414 and the central stage 416, and the first repulsion flight part 438 of the rebound flight stage 420 from the discharge port 436 of the rolling guide rail 434. It is released vigorously toward. Then, the game ball B released toward the first repulsion flight unit 438 is in the direction opposite to the direction (left direction) released by the high repulsion member constituting the first repulsion flight unit 438, and the central stage. It is possible to entertain the movement by jumping to 416 and falling on the rolling stage 414 and showing the player the game ball B that jumps dynamically in the pachinko machine 1. (A route indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 24 is referred to as a “left route”).

  On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the second distribution port 338 by the distribution device 330 is dropped and released from the second discharge unit 402 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the game ball effect space 308, and the effect display device 202. Is dropped onto the central stage 416 so as to be longitudinally cut in the front side (the route indicated by the broken line in FIG. 24 is referred to as “middle route”). The game ball B that has fallen to the central stage 416 is received by the central stage 416 with almost no jump and rolls to the rolling receiving stage 414 via the guide guidance stage 418. As a result, the game ball B moves fast on the central stage 416, and moves relatively slowly from the central stage 416 to the rolling receiving stage 414. It is designed to be entertained.

  On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the third distribution port 340 by the distribution device 330 is the second repulsion of the rebound flight stage 420 from the third discharge portion 408 disposed on the right side of the center of the game ball effect space 308. It is dropped and released onto the flying part 440. Then, the game ball B that has fallen on the second repulsion flight part 440 immediately rebounds in the direction of the rolling receiving stage 414 (left direction) by the highly repulsive member (in FIG. 24, a two-dot chain line). The indicated route, called the “right route”). By giving the game ball B a continuous movement due to the fall and rebound flight, the player can entertain the player by causing the game ball B to move rhythmically. Since the second rebound flying portion 440 is provided with a curved surface portion, the direction and position of the rebound flying differ depending on the position at which the game ball B falls, and randomly depending on the fall state of the game ball B. The movement of the jumping game ball B can be enjoyed.

  It should be noted that as the game balls repelled from the rebound flight stage 420 (the first rebound flight unit 438 and the second rebound flight unit 440) fly to the left side of the rolling reception stage 414, rolling on the rolling reception stage 414 is performed. Will jump from the uphill portion 428 arranged on the right side of the rolling stage 414 toward the central stage 416, and the jumping game ball B will ride on the central stage 416 or may be the recovery stage 422. The player will be able to entertain by falling down.

  By the way, since the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the pachinko island facility, the temperature in the pachinko island facility is increased by heat generated from the effect display device 202, the power supply board 131, the light emitting means 314, and the like. This heat is transmitted to the main control MPU 504, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 94 for controlling the progress of the game, for example. When the heat reaches the upper limit temperature of the operating temperature of the main control MPU 504, the main control MPU 504 malfunctions (thermal runaway). ) Or when the chip junction temperature rises to the junction temperature. If it does so, a player will be forced to interrupt a game and will make a player feel uncomfortable. For this reason, it is necessary to suppress as much as possible the member attached to the pachinko machine 1 that generates heat, and to suppress the temperature rise of the pachinko island equipment.

  In this embodiment, the sorting device 330 includes only one sorting motor 350, and the first sorting port 336, which is a plurality of sorting ports, is controlled by controlling the rotation direction of the sorting motor 350. , It can be distributed to any one of the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340. Thereby, compared with the case where the distribution motor for distributing to the 1st distribution port 336, the 2nd distribution port 338, and the 3rd distribution port 340 is each provided, the heat_generation | fever of a distribution motor can be suppressed, Pachinko Island This can contribute to the suppression of the temperature rise of the equipment.

[About arrangement of light emitting means]
Next, the arrangement of the light emitting means 314 will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of the light emitting means. A plurality of light emitting means 314 are mounted on various LED boards, and these various LED boards are accommodated in the game board 5 together with other members such as the central accessory 200 in a state where the various LED boards are accommodated in the decoration unit 240 shown in FIG. It is attached. A lamp driving board 532 described later is also attached to the game board 5 in a state of being housed on the upper side of the decoration unit 240.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the lamp driving board 532 is provided with a plurality of light emitting means 314 ′ capable of emitting light, and a detailed description thereof will be described later, but a lamp control unit 532a for turning on the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ in gradations, 29 is configured to include a serial-parallel conversion unit 532b and a sorting device driving unit 532c that excite and drive the sorting motor 350 of the sorting device 330 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the various LED boards are configured to belong to any one of group A, group B, group C, and group D, and the lamp driving board 532 is configured to belong to group E. It has become. The group A includes a game board left middle LED board A1 and a game board left LED board A2. The group B includes a game board lower left LED board B1 and a game board lower LED board B2. The group C includes a lower right decoration side LED board C1, a right warp side LED board C2, and an upper right decoration lower LED board C3. The group D includes a game board upper left LED board D1, an upper right decoration middle LED board D2, and an upper right decoration upper LED board D3.

  Group A and Group C are supplied with + 18V of the first system described later (+ 18V created by the power supply board 131), and Group B and Group D are + 18V of the second system described later (created by the lamp driving board 532). + 18V) is supplied. In the present embodiment, the various LED boards and the lamp driving boards 532 are grouped so that the power consumed by the group A and the group C and the power consumed by the group B, the group D, and the group E are approximately the same. .

  The light emitting means 314 mounted on the various LED boards of group A and group B are arranged in a dense state as shown in FIG. When the light emitting means 314 is turned on in such a dense state, the temperatures of the LED substrate and its surroundings are increased by the heat generated from each other, and heat is trapped around the LED substrate. For this reason, the light emitting means 314 may be damaged by the influence of the heat.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification is performed by operating the RAM clear switch 94a shown in FIG. By turning on 314 ', the lighting time of the light emitting means 314, 314' is shortened as much as possible. As a result, heat generated by the light emitting means 314 of group A, heat generated by the light emitting means 314 of group B, heat generated by the light emitting means 314 of group C, heat generated by the light emitting means 314 of group D, and light emitting means 314 of group E The heat generated by the light emitting means 314, 314 'can be dispersed for each group, such as heat generated by'. Therefore, in the period until the next turn-on turn comes, the light-emitting means 314 is not turned on, so the light-emitting means 314 is cooled, and heat is trapped in various LED boards, the lamp driving board 532 and the surroundings. Can be prevented. Therefore, the light emitting means 314 and 314 'can be prevented from being damaged by heat.

  Here, on the lower left LED board B1 of the game board of group B, as shown in FIG. 36, a plurality of light emitting means 314 are arranged in 17 systems of channels CH1 to CH17 in a state of being electrically connected in series. ing. The light emitting means 314 is turned on or gradation lighted by supplying a predetermined current to each of the channels CH1 to CH17. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, a plurality of light emitting means 314 are arranged in three systems of channels CH1 to CH3 in a state where the light emitting means 314 are electrically connected in series on the lower game board LED B2 of the group B. . The light emitting means 314 is turned on or gradation lighted by supplying a predetermined current to each of the channels CH1 to CH17.

  The light emitting means 314 of the channel CH17 of the game board lower left LED board B1 will be described in detail later. The current flows by a current mirror circuit CM provided on the lower left LED board B1.

[About game board features]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A is a drawing substitute photo showing the game board from the front with the light emitting means turned on, and FIG. 37B is a drawing substitute showing the game board from the front with the light emitting means turned off. It is a photograph. FIG. 38A is a drawing-substituting photograph in which the vicinity of the logo decoration body of the game board is copied from an oblique side, and FIG. 38B is a drawing-substituting photograph in which a part of the gaming board is copied from above. FIG. 39A is a drawing-substituting photograph showing the gaming board according to the present invention from the front, and FIG. 39B is a drawing-substituting photograph showing the conventional gaming board from the front. FIG. 40A is a drawing-substituting photograph in which the gaming board according to the present invention is photographed from the diagonally left front, and FIG. 40B is a drawing-substituting photograph in which the conventional gaming board is photographed from the diagonally left front.

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 39B and 40B, the game board in the conventional pachinko machine is made of wooden plywood having a predetermined thickness, and obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front side. A game board base, and a front component member that is fixed to the front side of the game board base and that defines an outer periphery of the game area and has a guide rail that guides a game ball that is driven into the game area. The game board base has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a frame-shaped central accessory is fixed to the through-hole from the front side of the game board base, and the game board passes through the frame of the central bonus The display screen of the effect display device fixed to the rear side of the base can be visually recognized by the player. In this way, since the conventional game board is configured, a space extending rearward from the front surface of the game board base can be formed in the frame of the central bonus, and the space between the effect display device can be formed. In the space, an accessory such as a stage or a three-dimensionally decorated ornament is arranged to prevent the game board from becoming flat.

  In order to differentiate from the conventional game board, it is conceivable to attach a larger effect display device, that is, a central accessory having a larger frame to the game board base. However, when the central actor is enlarged, the game area formed around it becomes relatively small, so the range where the game ball flows down becomes narrow, the change in the movement of the game ball becomes poor, and You may not be able to enjoy the movement, which may reduce your interest in gaming.

  Since the game board 5 of the present example has the above-described configuration, as shown in FIGS. 37 to 40, the three-dimensional decoration unit 240 disposed on the rear side of the transparent holding plate 242 for holding the obstacle nail 230 and the like. The player can visually recognize the decorative body 312 and the like that are formed on the game board 5 and the entire game board 5 has a depth, and can give the player an impression different from the conventional game board at first glance. In the island facility (pachinko island facility) of the hall where various pachinko machines are installed, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is made more conspicuous and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39 (B) and 40 (B), in the conventional game board, a predetermined design characterizing the pachinko machine is applied on the front surface of the game board base on which the obstacle nail is implanted. However, the symbol is drawn so that it can be seen three-dimensionally when viewed from the front of the game board (see FIG. 39 (B)). As shown in B), it can be discriminated at a glance that the symbol is a three-dimensional symbol that is not visible three-dimensionally. And all the conventional game boards have such a structure, and are familiar and well-known to the player.

  However, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example uses the holding plate 242 that holds the obstacle nail 230 as a transparent member, and the decorative body 312 and the like disposed on the rear side thereof as a three-dimensionally shaped member. As shown in FIG. 37 to FIG. 40, the decorative body 312 that can be seen from any angle is viewed from any angle, and the game board 5 has a depth and depth. At first glance, it gives a distinctly different impression. Further, since the holding plate 242 for holding the obstacle nail 230 is transparent, the player can hardly see the holding plate 242 and the obstacle nail 230 is three-dimensionally shaped as shown in FIG. The game board 5 can be seen to be planted on the surface of the decorative body 312 and has a completely different form from the conventional game board. As a result, for a player who is familiar with the conventional game board, the game board 5 is completely unseen, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted so that the player can play with the pachinko machine 1 of this example. It has become.

  In addition, the game board 5 of the present example has a diffusion decoration member 316 disposed on the rear side of the decoration body 312 and further a light emitting means 314 disposed on the rear side thereof, so that the decoration body 312 (background decoration body 312e) and Since the diffusion decoration member 316 is a transparent member and has a multilayer structure, it can be visually recognized that the respective members are arranged in the depth direction, and the decoration is deeper. In addition, the light emitting means 314 arranged on the rearmost side emits light in a dot shape, which makes it easier to recognize the position of the light emitting means 314 in the front-rear direction compared to the case where light is emitted in a planar shape. Further, it is possible to recognize that the light emitting means 314 is arranged at a position further away from the diffusion decoration member 316 by a predetermined distance, and the gaming board 5 has a deeper depth and a stronger sense of depth. As can be seen from a comparison between FIG. 37A and FIG. 37B, the sense of depth is enhanced by causing the light emitting means 314 to emit light.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the design applied to the base of the game board in which the obstacle nail is implanted cannot be made to emit light, but the game board 5 of this example holds the obstacle nail 230 as shown in the figure. Since the decorative body 312 of the decorative unit 240 capable of emitting light disposed on the rear side is disposed using the holding plate 242 to be transparent as a transparent member, the portion where the obstacle nail 230 is retained can also be illuminated and decorated. Unprecedented game board 5 can attract the player's interest.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), a large diorama reflecting the image of a golf course is provided in the game board 5 so that the stage setting related to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized at a glance. And the cup (first receiving port 410) provided on the green (rolling stage 414) in the diorama is conspicuously arranged, so that when a game ball is received in the cup, It can be recalled that there is a good thing for the player (in this example, it is controlled to the special mode 2 where the control of the high probability state is highly likely to be executed), and the expectation for the game of the pachinko machine 1 Can be improved.

[Functional configuration of main board and peripheral board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 is broadly divided into a group of the main board 500 and a group of the peripheral board 502, and among these, the group of the main board 500 plays game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, award display). Sphere payout etc.), and a group of peripheral boards 502 controls the rendering operation (light emission decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, etc.).

  The main board 500 includes a main control board 94 and a payout control board 133. As illustrated, the main control board 94 includes a main control MPU 504 as a microprocessor and a main control I / O port 506 as an input / output device (I / O device). The main control MPU 504 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. It also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

  Via the main control I / O port 506, the count sensor 278, the first starting port sensor 216, the second starting port sensor 218, the gate sensor 206, each general winning port sensor 226, the all winning port winning number counting sensor 508, the magnetic Detection signals from the detection sensor 510, the ball discharge sensor 248, and the like are respectively input.

  It should be noted that the number-of-winners winning number counting sensor 508 is omitted for specific arrangement positions, but a plurality of types of winning holes provided in the game area 37 (in this example, the general winning port 224, the first start port 212). , The second starting port 214, and the big winning port 272), which detects all the game balls that have entered the game, and the balls are entered based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the total winning port winning number counting sensor 508. The number of game balls played is counted by the main control MPU 504. The magnetic detection sensor 510 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5 and in the vicinity of the first start port 212 and the second start port 214 in the game area 37, and detects a magnetic change. That is, the magnetic detection sensor 510 is a sensor that detects that an illegal act of illegally entering a game ball into the first start port 212 and the second start port 214 using a magnet or the like is performed. When it is detected by 510 that the magnetism has changed, the main control MPU 504 performs processing for notifying that fraud has been made.

  Further, the main control MPU 504 is connected to the start solenoid 220, the attacker solenoid 276, the special symbol display 302, the special symbol hold indicator 304, and the status indicator 306 via the main control I / O port 506 based on the above detection signal. A drive signal for driving the normal symbol display 322 and the normal symbol hold display 324 is output.

  Various commands are exchanged between the main control board 94 and the payout control board 133, that is, bidirectionally, and between the main control board 94 and the peripheral control board 92, the main control board 94 to the peripheral control board. Various commands are output to 92, that is, in one direction.

  As shown in the drawing, the payout control board 133 includes a payout control MPU 512 as a microprocessor and a payout control I / O port 514 as an I / O device. The payout control MPU 512 incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data. It also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

  A command for driving the ball payout device 125 (the payout motor 126) output from the main control board 94 is input via the payout control I / O port 514, and the payout control MPU 512 is based on this command. A drive signal for driving the payout motor 126 of the ball payout device 125 is output via the O port 514. Thereby, the ball payout device 125 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls. Note that the payout control MPU 512 pays out a ball when a loan request signal is input from a prepaid card unit (not shown). Further, the payout control MPU 512 receives a command output from the main control board 94 when an abnormality occurs (for example, a magnetic change is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 510) via the payout control I / O port 514. Based on this command, a drive stop signal for stopping the drive of the firing motor 128 in the launcher unit 130 is output via the payout control I / O port 514. Thereby, the driving of the firing motor 128 is stopped when an abnormality occurs.

  The peripheral board 502 includes a peripheral control board 92. As shown in the figure, the peripheral control board 92 includes a sub-integrated MPU 520 as a microprocessor, a sub-integrated ROM 522 that stores various processing programs and various commands, A sound source IC 524 that performs a high-quality sound and a sound source ROM 526 that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 524 are provided.

  Upon receiving the command from the main control board 94, the sub-integrated MPU 520 creates a display command related to the display effect based on this command and outputs it to the liquid crystal control board 528. The liquid crystal control board 528 controls the effect display device 202 formed of an LCD in accordance with the display command output from the sub-integrated MPU 520, and performs decorative display variation display, character display, etc.

  The sub-integrated MPU 520 includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 94, the sub command MPU 520 creates an effect command related to the effect based on this command. Are output to the sound source IC 524 from the parallel input / output port. The sound source IC 524 reads sound information from the sound source ROM 526 in accordance with the effect command output from the sub-integrated MPU 520, and performs control such that music and sound effects according to various effects are output from the speakers 18 and 57 described above. Further, the sub-integrated MPU 520 outputs drive data for driving the decoration lamp 530 such as the side decoration device 52 arranged on the front frame 4 in accordance with the effect command.

  Further, the sub-integrated MPU 520 turns on / off (ON / OFF) LEDs mounted on various light emitting means 314 arranged on the game board 5 from the serial input / output port to the lamp driving board 532 in accordance with the production command. ON / OFF data and drive data for driving the sorting motor 350 are output.

  In addition, detection signals from a rotation position detection sensor 384 that detects the rotation position of the sorting motor 350, an intrusion detection sensor 382, a guide discharge detection sensor 466, a first reception detection sensor 442, a second reception detection sensor 444, and the like are: This is input to the peripheral control board 92 via the lamp driving board 532. When the detection signals from the rotation position detection sensor 384, the intrusion detection sensor 382, the guidance discharge detection sensor 466, the first reception detection sensor 442, and the second reception detection sensor 444 are input, the sub integrated MPU 520 receives the sorting motor 350, A control signal is output to the liquid crystal control board 528 or the like.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol display 302 for variably displaying the special symbol is controlled by the main control MPU 504 mounted on the main board 500, while the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, various light emitting means 314, and the like. Control is performed by the sub-integrated MPU 520 mounted on the peripheral board 502. Therefore, the control burden on the main board 500 (main control MPU 504) can be reduced, and various effects can be executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration unit 240, and the like under the control of the peripheral board 502 (sub-integrated MPU 520). It is possible to prevent the interest in the production from deteriorating.

[Lamp drive board]
Next, the lamp driving substrate 532 will be described. FIG. 42 is a block diagram of the lamp driving substrate. Here, the life cycle of recent pachinko machines has become shorter, and manufacturers need to develop pachinko machines in the shortest possible time, and are making various efforts. For example, the above-described main control board 94, peripheral control board 92, and the like are control boards that can be used in common regardless of the type of pachinko machine.

  The lamp driving board 532 outputs a gradation lighting signal for gradation-lighting the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ based on the lamp data and driving data serially output from the peripheral control board 92 described above, and the distribution motor 350 is operated. An excitation signal that is driven by excitation is output. First, the configuration of the lamp driving substrate 532 will be described, various signals input to the lamp driving substrate 532 will be described, the lamp control unit that performs gradation control of the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ will be described, and then the sorting motor will be described. A serial-parallel converter that performs driving control 350 will be described.

[Configuration of lamp drive board]
As shown in FIG. 42, the lamp driving substrate 532 includes a lamp control unit 532a and a serial / parallel conversion unit 532b. The lamp control unit 532a performs gradation control of the light emitting unit 314. The serial / parallel converter 532 b performs drive control of the sorting motor 350.

[Various signals input to the lamp drive board]
As shown in FIG. 42, in the lamp driving substrate 532, the transfer clock LP-CLK, the ramp data LP-DAT, the latch signal LP-LAT, and the MODE signal are input to the lamp control unit 532a, while serial / parallel conversion is performed. The transfer clock MT-CLK, drive data MT-DAT, and latch signal MT-LAT are input to the unit 532b.

  The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 includes a lamp serial output transmission port 520a, a sorting motor serial output transmission port 520b, a parallel output port (hereinafter simply referred to as “output port”) 520c, and a parallel input. Port (hereinafter, simply referred to as “input port”) 520d and the like are incorporated. The lamp serial output transmission port 520a outputs the lamp data LP-DAT to the lamp control unit 532a bit by bit (serial output) in synchronization with the transfer clock LP-CLK. The sorting motor serial output transmission port 520b serially outputs drive data MT-DAT to the serial-parallel conversion unit 532b in synchronization with the transfer clock MT-CLK. The output port 520c outputs the latch signal LP-LAT and the MODE signal to the ramp control unit 532a, and outputs the latch signal MT-LAT to the serial / parallel conversion unit 532b. Note that a detection signal RT-SEN from a rotational position detection sensor 384 that detects the original position of the sorting motor 350 is input to the input port 520 d via the lamp driving substrate 532.

[About the lamp controller]
The lamp controller 532a includes a plurality of gradation control ICs. These gradation control ICs are daisy chain connected, and one external resistor (not shown) is connected to each of them. The gradation control IC determines the maximum current to be output by an external resistor, and can set the maximum output current to 0 to 127, that is, the output current to be output in 128 steps. In this embodiment, TLC5922 manufactured by Texas Instruments (TI) is used as the gradation control IC. This TLC5922 has 16 channels of output, and each output channel can flow a programmable constant current in the range of 0 to 80 milliamperes (mA) in addition to individual ON / OFF control. Is set based on the MODE signal). Further, the maximum output current can be set by one external resistor, and the output current can be output for each channel in 128 steps from 0 to 127 with respect to this maximum output current.

  The gradation control IC takes in the ramp data LP-DAT serially output from the peripheral control board 92, and when the latch signal LP-LAT is inputted, the light emission means based on the taken-in lamp data LP-DAT. A gradation lighting signal is output to 314 and 314 ′. In this gradation lighting signal, currents of 0 to 127 steps with respect to the maximum output current flow to the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ based on the set gradation data, and the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ are turned on or gradation lighting is performed. To do.

[Serial parallel converter]
The serial / parallel conversion unit 532b takes in the drive data MT-DAT serially output from the peripheral control board 92, and when the latch signal MT-LAT is inputted, the serial / parallel conversion unit 532b performs the oscillation based on the fetched drive data MT-DAT. A distribution motor drive signal is output to the distribution device drive unit 532c, and the distribution device drive unit 532c outputs a drive pulse (excitation) to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the distribution motor 350. Signal).

  As described above, the rotating body 348 is connected to the drive shaft 374 of the sorting motor 350, and the driving shaft 374 of the sorting motor 350 rotates, and the slit 370 formed in the detection unit 372 of the rotating body 348. Is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 384, the current position of the rotator 348 becomes the original position of the rotator 348 shown in FIG.

[About power supply system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the power distribution board 151, the power supply board 131, and the power supply relay terminal plate 540 shown in FIG. 4 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine.

[Distribution board, power supply board, and power relay terminal board]
In the distribution board 151, the board connector 152 shown in FIG. 4 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 151a shown in FIG. 4 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 131 shown in FIG. 4 through the distribution board 151, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the distribution board 151 is supplied with AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) from the pachinko island facility. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the AC 24 V is supplied to the power supply board 131. It is like that. The power supply board 131 includes a + 34V creation circuit 131a, a + 18V creation circuit 131b, and a + 9V creation circuit 131c. The + 34V creation circuit 131a rectifies AC24V to create DC + 34V (DC + 34V, hereinafter referred to as + 34V). The + 18V creation circuit 131b rectifies AC24V to create DC + 18V (DC + 18V, hereinafter referred to as + 18V). The + 9V creation circuit 73a creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as + 9V) from + 18V created by the + 18V creation circuit 131b. The electric power created by the + 34V creation circuit 131a, + 18V creation circuit 131b, and + 9V creation circuit 131c is supplied to the peripheral control board 92 and the payout control board 133 via the power supply relay terminal board 540. Thus, the distribution board 151 receives AC24V from the Pachinko Island facility, the power supply board 131 rectifies the AC24V to create various direct currents (+ 34V, + 18V and + 9V), and the power relay terminal board 540 The direct current is supplied to the peripheral control board 92 and the payout control board 133, and the functions are shared.

[Power supply to each control board]
Next, the power supplied to each control board will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied from the power supply relay terminal board 540 are supplied to the payout control board 133 and the peripheral control board 92, respectively, and these + 34V, + 18V and + 9V. Are supplied to the main control board 94 and the launch control board 550 through the payout control board 133, respectively, and are supplied to the lamp driving board 532 through the peripheral control board 92. Note that only + 18V supplied from the power supply relay terminal plate 540 is supplied to the liquid crystal control board 528 via the peripheral control board 92. Here, first, the power supplied to the dispensing control board 133 will be described, then the power supplied to the main control board 94, the power supplied to the launch control board 550, the power supplied to the peripheral control board 92, The power supplied to the liquid crystal control board 528 and the power supplied to the lamp driving board 532 will be described.

[Power supply supplied to the payout control board]
The payout control board 133 includes a payout control series regulator 133a in addition to the payout control MPU 512 and the like. The payout control series regulator 133a is supplied with + 9V supplied from the power supply relay terminal board 540, and from this + 9V, the reference voltage of the payout control board 133 is DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as + 5V). create. This +5 V is supplied to the payout control I / O port 514 shown in FIG. 41 in addition to the payout control MPU 512. 41 is supplied with + 34V and + 18V supplied from the power supply relay terminal plate 540, and + 34V is used for the payout shown in FIG. 41. The ball payout device drive circuit 133b for controlling the driving of the ball payout device 125 shown in FIG. It is used as a driving power source for the motor 126, and + 18V is used as a power source for a rotation angle switch (not shown) for detecting the rotation angle of the payout motor 126.

[About the power supplied to the main control board]
In addition to the main control MPU 504, the main control board 94 includes a main control series regulator 94a and a power failure monitoring circuit 94b. The main control series regulator 94a receives + 9V supplied from the payout control board 133, and creates + 5V that is the reference voltage of the main control board 94 from this + 9V. This +5 V is supplied to the main control I / O port 506 shown in FIG. 41 in addition to the main control MPU 504. The power failure monitoring circuit 94b receives + 18V and + 9V supplied from the payout control board 133, and monitors these + 18V and + 9V power failure or signs of instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 94b detects the sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 94b outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification to the payout control board 133 and the peripheral control board 92 in addition to the main control MPU 504. Further, the main control MPU 504 outputs a power failure notice signal to the external terminal board 560 via the main control I / O port 506. Note that a power failure notice signal is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 528 via the peripheral control board 92. As described above, the external terminal board 560 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a hall (not shown) so that the power failure or instantaneous power failure of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of occurrences thereof can be monitored. It has become.

  For + 34V and + 18V supplied from the payout control board 133, + 34V is used as a driving power source for the attacker solenoid 276, for example, and + 18V is used as a power source for the first start port sensor 216, for example.

[About the power supplied to the launch control board]
The launch control board 550 includes a launch control series regulator 550a. The launch control series regulator 550a receives + 9V supplied from the payout control board 133, and creates + 5V that is the reference voltage of the launch control board 550 from the + 9V. The launch motor drive circuit 550b that performs drive control of the launch motor 128 shown in FIG. 41 receives + 5V created by the launch control series regulator 550a and + 34V and + 18V supplied from the payout control board 133, respectively. For example, it is used as a driving power source for the firing motor 128, and + 18V is used as a power source for a touch switch or the like for detecting whether or not the player touches the operation handle 32 shown in FIG.

[About the power supplied to the peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 92 includes a sub integrated series regulator 92a in addition to the sub integrated MPU 520, the sound source IC 524, and the like. The sub-integrated series regulator 92a is supplied with + 9V supplied from the power supply relay terminal board 540. From this + 9V, the reference voltage of the sub-integrated MPU 520 is + 5V, and the reference voltage of the sound source IC 524 is DC + 3.3V (DC + 3). .3V, hereinafter referred to as + 3.3V). In addition to the sub-integrated MPU 520, + 5V is supplied to, for example, a bus buffer circuit (not shown), and this bus buffer circuit is used as a bus line interface between the sub-integrated MPU 520 and the sub-integrated ROM 522 shown in FIG. I use it. On the other hand, + 3.3V is supplied to the sub-integrated ROM 522 and the sound source ROM 526 shown in FIG. 41 in addition to the sound source IC 524, for example. + 18V supplied from the power supply relay terminal plate 540 is input to a power amplifier that amplifies music, sound effects, and the like output from the speakers 18 and 57 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, for example. Note that + 34V supplied from the power supply relay terminal plate 540 is output as it is to the liquid crystal control board 528 and the lamp driving board 532 and is not used by the peripheral control board 92.

[Power supply to the LCD control board]
The liquid crystal control board 528 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 534, a VDP 536, and a liquid crystal control power supply circuit 528a. The liquid crystal control MPU 534 is a microprocessor, and the VDP 536 performs display control of the effect display device 202 shown in FIG. 41 based on a control signal from the liquid crystal control MPU 534. The liquid crystal control power supply circuit 58e receives only + 18V supplied from the peripheral control board 92, and from this + 18V, + 3.3V that is the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control board 528 and DC + 1.5V that is the power source of the VDP 536 ( DC + 1.5V, hereinafter referred to as + 1.5V) and DC 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter referred to as + 2.5V). + 3.3V is supplied to the liquid crystal control MPU 534, the VDP 536, and the like. Thus, + 1.5V, + 2.5V, and + 3.3V are input to the VDP 356.

[Power supply to the lamp drive board]
The lamp drive board 532 includes a + 5V lamp drive series regulator 532d and a + 18V lamp drive series regulator 532e in addition to the lamp control unit 532a and the serial / parallel conversion unit 532b. The + 5V lamp drive series regulator 532d receives + 9V supplied from the peripheral control board 92, and creates + 5V which is the reference voltage of the lamp drive board 532 from + 9V. The + 5V is supplied to, for example, the lamp control unit 532a, the serial / parallel conversion unit 532b, and the like. The + 18V lamp drive series regulator 532d receives + 34V supplied from the peripheral control board 92, and creates + 18V from this + 34V. This + 18V is the same voltage as + 18V supplied from the peripheral control board 92. + 18V created by the + 18V lamp drive series regulator 532d and + 18V supplied from the peripheral control board 92 are supplied to the light emitting means 314 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, as the driving power source of the light emitting means 314, two systems of + 18V of the first system supplied from the peripheral control board 92 and + 18V of the second system created by the + 18V lamp driving series regulator 532d are used. + 18V is used. On the other hand, + 34V supplied from the peripheral control board 92 is used as a drive power source of the sorting motor 350 shown in FIG. 41, for example.

[About two systems of + 18V supplied to the lamp controller]
Next, two systems of + 18V supplied to the lamp control unit 532a of the lamp driving substrate 532 will be described. FIG. 44 is a block diagram of the lamp control unit.

  The lamp control unit 532a includes a gradation control IC group A, a gradation control IC group B, a gradation control IC group C, and a gradation control IC group D. Each gradation control IC group includes a gradation control IC. The gradation control IC group A turns on or gradation lights up the light emitting means 314 of various LED boards belonging to the group A shown in FIG. The gradation control IC group B turns on or gradation-lights the light emitting means 314 of various LED boards belonging to the group B shown in FIG. The gradation control IC group C lights or gradation lights the light emitting means 314 of various LED boards belonging to the group C shown in FIG. The gradation control IC group D turns on or gradation lights up the light emitting means 314 of various LEd substrates belonging to the group D shown in FIG.

  As described above, + 34V, +18, and + 9V are supplied to the lamp driving board 532 from the peripheral control board 94. The + 5V lamp drive series regulator 532d creates + 5V, which is the reference voltage of the lamp drive board 532, from + 9V supplied from the peripheral control board 92. This +5 V is supplied to the gradation control IC group A to gradation control IC group D.

  + 18V supplied from the peripheral control board 92 is supplied to the gradation control IC group A and the gradation control IC group C as + 18V of the first system. The + 18V lamp drive series regulator 532d creates + 18V from + 34V supplied from the peripheral control board 92. This + 18V is supplied to the gradation control IC group B and the gradation control IC group D as + 18V of the second system. As described above, the lamp control unit 532 is supplied with + 18V of two systems, that is, + 18V of the first system and + 18V of the second system.

  As shown in FIG. 36, a plurality of light emitting means 314 are mounted on various LED boards. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect unfolded by the effect display device 202 by illuminating or illuminating the light emitting means 314 brilliantly. Due to such effects, as described above, it is necessary to mount as many light emitting means 314 as possible on various LED substrates.

  However, as shown in FIG. 43, if the first system + 18V created by the + 18V creation circuit 131b of the power supply board 131 is used to supply all the light emitting means 314, the + 18V creation circuit 131b is a large circuit. Must be configured. In this case, since the heat generated by the + 18V generating circuit 131b also increases, it is necessary to provide cooling fins or the like, and the power supply board 131 becomes enormous.

  By the way, the pachinko machines are lined up on the pachinko island facility in the back direction, so the power supply board 131 provided with cooling fins for cooling has a large depth direction, and the pachinko machines interfere with each other. There is a risk that it will not fit in the Pachinko Island facilities. For this reason, it is difficult to supply + 18V to the light emitting means 314 with only + 18V of the first system by the power supply board 131. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lamp drive board 532 is provided with a + 18V lamp drive series regulator 532e that creates + 18V of the second system. As a result, the heat generated by the creation of + 18V to be supplied to the light emitting means 314 can be distributed between the power supply board 131 and the lamp driving board 532, so that only + 18V of the first system by the power supply board 131 causes + 18V to the light emitting means 314. As compared with the case where the power is supplied, the amount of heat generated by the power supply substrate 131 and the lamp driving substrate 532 can be suppressed to be small. Therefore, it can contribute to suppression of the temperature rise of the pachinko island facility.

[Current mirror circuit]
Next, the current mirror circuit CM provided on the game board lower left LED board B1 shown in FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 45 is a circuit diagram showing a current mirror circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the group B includes a game board lower left LED board B1 and a game board lower LED board B2. On the lower left side LED board B1 of the game board, as described above, a plurality of light emitting means 314 are arranged in 17 systems of channels CH1 to CH17 in a state of being electrically connected in series. On the side LED board B2, as described above, a plurality of light emitting means 314 are arranged in three systems of channels CH1 to CH3 in a state of being electrically connected in series.

  As shown in FIG. 45, a + 18V voltage is supplied from the lamp drive board 532 to the lower left LED board B1 of the game board. A voltage of + 18V is applied to the channels CH1 to CH14 and CH16, and a voltage of + 18V is applied to the channels CH15 and CH17 via the current mirror circuit MC.

  The current flowing in the channels CH1 to CH16 of the LED board B1 on the lower left side of the game board is controlled by the gradation control IC: GRP-B1 of the gradation control IC group B, so that the light emission means 314 of the channels CH1 to CH16 is turned on or The gradation lights up. Specifically, as described above, the gradation control IC: GRP-B1 takes in the ramp data LP-DAT output serially from the peripheral control board 92, and receives this when the latch signal LP-LAT is input. A gradation lighting signal is output to the light emitting means 314 based on the lamp data LP-DAT captured as a trigger. In this gradation lighting signal, a current of 0 to 127 steps with respect to the maximum output current flows to the light emitting means 314 based on the set gradation data, and the light emitting means 314 is turned on or gradation lighted.

  A voltage of +18 V is supplied to the channel CH17 through the current mirror circuit CM together with the channel CH15. The current mirror circuit CM includes transistors TR1 and TR2, and these transistors TR1 and TR2 have the same characteristics. The current flowing through the channel CH17 by the transistors TR1 and TR2 has the same current value as the current flowing through the channel CH15. That is, the current controlled by the gradation control IC: GRP-B1 flows through the channel CH15, and the controlled current having the same current value flows through the channel CH17. Thereby, the light emitting means 314 of the duplication source channel CH15 and the light emitting means 314 of the duplication destination channel CH17 are lit in the same manner.

  On the other hand, the lower LED board B2 of the game board is supplied with a voltage of + 18V from the lamp driving board 532, although not shown. A voltage of + 18V is applied to the channels CH1 to CH3.

  The current flowing through the channels CH1 to CH3 of the lower LED board B2 of the game board is controlled by the gradation control IC: GRP-B2 of the gradation control IC group B (not shown), so that the light emitting means 314 of the channels CH1 to CH3 Lights up or gradation lights up. Specifically, as described above, the gradation control IC: GRP-B2 takes in the ramp data LP-DAT output serially from the peripheral control board 92, and receives this when the latch signal LP-LAT is input. A gradation lighting signal is output to the light emitting means 314 based on the lamp data LP-DAT captured as a trigger. In this gradation lighting signal, a current of 0 to 127 steps with respect to the maximum output current flows to the light emitting means 314 based on the set gradation data, and the light emitting means 314 is turned on or gradation lighted.

  Here, for example, the light emitting means 314 of the lower left LED board B1 of the game board is connected to any one of the remaining channels CH4 to CH16 of the gradation control IC: GRP-B2 of the gradation control IC group B. There is a method of electrically connecting and controlling the current flowing through the light emitting means 314 of the channel CH17 of the lower left LED board B1 of the game board. That is, there is a method of allocating the channel CH17 of the lower left LED board B1 of the game board to any one of the remaining channels CH4 to CH16 of the gradation control IC: GRP-B2 of the gradation control IC group B. In this case, it is necessary to change the data of the ramp data LP-DAT serially output from the peripheral control board 92 described above, and the data structure includes the gradation control IC of the gradation control IC group B: GRP-B2 channel. Data for lighting or gradation lighting of the light emission means 314 of CH1 to CH3 and data for lighting or gradation lighting of the light emission means 314 of the channel CH17 of the game board lower left side LED board B1 are mixed, for example, The programmer is responsible for checking the correctness of the data (for example, the timing of lighting or gradation lighting). Takes a while, it can not contribute to reducing the development time.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the light emitting means 314 of the channel more than the number of channels (16 channels) of the gradation control IC: GRP-B1 is lit or lit, the current mirror is applied to the lower left LED board B1 of the game board. By adding the circuit MC, it is possible to deal with without assigning to any one of the remaining channels of the gradation control IC: GRP-B2 of the gradation control IC group B. Therefore, it is easy to understand which group data, no mistakes, and the labor of confirmation can be greatly reduced, contributing to shortening the development period. In addition, since it is not necessary to change the design of the gradation control IC group B of the lamp driving substrate 532, it is common even when the light emitting means 314 having more channels than the gradation control IC channels (16 channels) is lit or lit. The lamp driving substrate 532 can be used.

  When it is desired to emit light over a wide range by spreading the light emitting means 314, when the driving ability of the light emitting means 314 is insufficient (predetermined current cannot be supplied, etc.), the current having the same current value as the current flowing through the channel of the original gradation control IC Can be dealt with by creating a current mirror circuit CM and flowing it to the copy destination channel, and it is not necessary to recreate the lamp drive board 532 (no need to add a gradation control IC to the lamp drive board 532). . In addition, when there is a channel for which the lighting or gradation lighting mode is to be the same and there are not enough channels for the gradation control IC, a current having the same current value as the current flowing through the channel of the gradation control IC of the copy source is current. This can be dealt with by creating the mirror circuit CM and flowing it to the duplication destination channel, and it is not necessary to recreate the lamp driving substrate 532.

  In this embodiment, a pair transistor of QST8 manufactured by ROHM, which is an integrated circuit component in which pair transistors are integrated in one package, is used as the current mirror circuit CM. The light emitting means 314 may be in a state advantageous or unfavorable for the player (for example, the lottery probability is in a high probability state or a low probability state) depending on the change in luminance or color, or the effect display shown in FIG. Expectation of whether or not to win a lottery when displaying a lottery result with a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed after a plurality of decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order on the device 202 It is often used to notify the degree.

  By the way, since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility, it is affected by a temperature change in the pachinko island facility. Therefore, by using a pair transistor of QST8 manufactured by Rohm as the current mirror circuit CM, the characteristics of the transistors can be made the same. Thereby, the influence of the temperature change which a mutual transistor receives is the same. Since one of the transistors is electrically connected to the gradation control IC: GRP-B1, a constant current always flows even under the influence of a temperature change. As a result, the same current flows in the other transistor as in the other transistor. Therefore, since the brightness and color of the light emitting means 314 are not unintended, the player is not misunderstood.

[Distributor drive circuit]
Next, the sorting device driving unit 532c of the lamp driving substrate 532 illustrated in FIG. 42 will be described. FIG. 46 is a circuit diagram of the distribution device driving unit 532c, and FIG. 47 is a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit of the drive IC.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the sorting device driving unit 532c includes a drive IC 1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: MP4303). The drive IC 1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded and a sorting motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, an excitation signal is output from the corresponding collector terminal. A certain drive pulse is output.

  As shown in FIG. 46, + 34V supplied from the power supply board 131 shown in FIG. 43 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 1 via the Zener diode ZD1 (HZ36BPTK-E in this embodiment). The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD1 is electrically connected to + 34V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD1 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive IC1. + 34V input to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 1 serves as a drive power source for the sorting motor 350. The base terminal of the drive IC 1 is electrically connected to the serial / parallel converter 532b shown in FIG. 42, and is excited from the corresponding collector terminal in accordance with the sorting motor drive signal output from the serial / parallel converter 532b. A driving pulse as a signal is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 via the resistors R1 to R4 and the connector CN1. These drive pulses are performed by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350, and rotate the sorting motor 350. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC 1, the drive IC 1 is damaged, so that the cathode terminal of the drive IC 1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD 1 are electrically connected as protection.

[Heat absorbed by drive IC]
As described above, the drive IC 1 includes the four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground and the distribution motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the corresponding collector terminal A drive pulse which is an excitation signal is output from. As shown in FIG. 47, the drive IC 1 includes Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 and flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4 in the same package.

  The Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 are formed into chips by electrically connecting two Darlington-connected transistors, resistors, and diodes. The collector terminals of the Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 are electrically connected to flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1-FBD4, one of which is grounded with the ground (GND). The flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 are counter-electromotive force generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) is interrupted to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350. By converting the electric power to heat and removing it, the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 are protected, and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired into a chip, and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD3 and A pair of FBDs 4 is formed into a chip. Thus, the package of the drive IC 1 generates heat by the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 that output drive pulses (excitation signals) to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350. And the heat generated by the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4 that convert the back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 into heat. The absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the drive IC 1).

  Here, as described above, the decoration unit 240 is mounted with various LED boards on which a plurality of light emitting means 314 are mounted so that light can be emitted, a sorting device 330 including a sorting motor 350, and the like. Since the effect display device 202 is attached to the decoration unit 240, a space for attaching various LED boards, the sorting device 330, and the like is limited. For example, the lamp drive board 532 needs to be attached with a reduced length of the wiring (harness) so that the wiring (harness) that transmits the drive pulse (excitation signal) to the sorting motor 350 is not affected by noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means 314 ′ capable of emitting light are mounted on the lamp driving board 532 and the lamp driving board 532 is attached to the upper side of the decoration unit 240, thereby avoiding the spatial limitation described above. The length of the wiring (harness) to the sorting motor 350 can also be shortened. Thus, the lamp driving substrate 532 also serves as an LED substrate and is in a state where the light emitting means 314 ′ coexists in addition to the drive IC 1.

  However, in addition to the lamp drive board 532, the game board 5 is mounted with various LED boards on which a plurality of light emitting means 314 are mounted, an effect display device 202 which is a 15-inch large LCD for displaying various effect images, and the like. The heat generated from the light emitting means 314 and the effect display device 202 is transmitted to the lamp driving substrate 532. Since the light emitting means 314 ′ and the drive IC 1 mounted on the lamp driving substrate 532 also generate heat, the periphery of the lamp driving substrate 532 is in a state where heat is stored. In addition, since the pachinko island facilities are lined up behind other pachinko machines, the temperature in the pachinko island facilities is increased by heat generated from the power supply board, various control boards, light emitting means, and the like of the pachinko machines.

  As described above, even if the heat generated by the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 and the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 is absorbed by the package of the drive IC1, the temperature around the drive IC1, that is, around the lamp driving substrate 532 is high. In this state, the efficiency of escaping the absorbed heat to the periphery of the lamp driving substrate 532 is lowered, so that heat is stored in the package of the drive IC 1. Then, when the temperature of the package of the drive IC 1 increases and the junction temperature of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 increases to the junction temperature, the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 fail.

[About the output order of the sorting motor drive signal]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the order of the drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 is the A phase, B phase, / A The sorting motor drive signal is input to the base terminal of the drive IC 1 so that the phase becomes the phase B and the phase B. Accordingly, the order in which the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4 convert the back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 into heat is also FBD1, FBD3, FBD2, and FBD4. Then, the above-described chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired and the chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired alternately generate heat. As the order of the drive pulses (excitation signals) output to the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 in the case of generating heat alternately in this way, the A phase, / A Phase, B phase, and / B phase, that is, flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4 heat back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of sorting motor 350 When the order of conversion to FBD1, FBD2, FBD3, and FBD4 is compared, the heat generation or flyback voltage of the chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired in the case of alternately generating heat Heat generation of the chip in which the absorption diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired can be suppressed to a small amount, which can contribute to a reduction in the temperature rise of the package of the drive IC1. Therefore, failure of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 due to heat can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the order of the drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 is the A phase, B phase, / A For example, for example, the fourth pin and the ninth pin, which are the collector terminals of the drive IC 1 shown in FIG. 46, are wired in advance so as to replace each other on the connector CN 1 side. As a result, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) to be output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350 is changed to the A phase, / A phase, B phase. And even if it is programmed to become the / B phase, the order is B phase, / A phase, A phase and / B phase on the connector CN1 side, and the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are a pair of chips. And flyback voltage absorption diode A chip FBD1 and FBD2 becomes a pair, but can generate heat alternately.

[About game content]
Next, the game content realized by the pachinko machine 1 described above will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 9 and the like, the game ball is launched by the launcher unit 130 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by the player operating the operation handle 32. The game ball launched from the launcher unit 130 is released to the upper part of the game area 37 through the area surrounded by the outer rail 76 and the inner rail 77 of the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and the game area 37 is passed through the obstacle nail. It flows down toward the out port 228 while colliding with 230 or the like. When the game ball flowing down the game area 37 passes through the gate 204 and is detected by the gate sensor 206, the normal symbol display unit 322 starts to display the variation of the normal symbol.

  When a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 206, the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination within a predetermined range. When normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 322 is started, it is determined whether or not to win based on the random number for determination per normal symbol. In a manner, the LED is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when it is determined to be a win, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped while the upper LED of the normal symbol display 322 is lit, and when it is determined to be out of the normal symbol display 322 In the state where the LED on the lower side of 322 is lit, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped.

  Further, when the normal symbol display unit 322 is executing the normal symbol variation display, and when the variable winning ball apparatus 210 is controlled to open and close based on the result of the normal symbol display unit 322 being a hit. It is possible to store up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment) of random numbers for normal symbol extraction based on the game ball passing through the gate 204 and being detected by the gate sensor 206. The number of random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol to be stored (the number of ordinary symbols stored) is displayed by the ordinary symbol hold indicator 324. As described above, the normal symbol hold display 324 is constituted by two LEDs. In this example, turning on the upper LED indicates that the number of reserved maps is 1, and turning on the upper and lower two LEDs indicates that the number of reserved drawings is 2, By flashing the LED and turning on the lower LED, it is indicated that the number of ordinary reserved memory is 3, and by flashing the upper and lower two LEDs, it is indicated that the number of ordinary reserved memory is 4.

  Further, the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 322 stops after the elapse of a predetermined period, and when the display result of the normal symbol at the time of the stop becomes “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 210 is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) Control to open state. On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol display 322 is “displaced”, the closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 214 without controlling the variable winning ball apparatus 210 to the open state. The first start port 212 is in a state in which a game ball can enter.

  That is, the second start port 214 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the display result corresponding to the normal symbol display 322 is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the start opening solenoid 220 is moved and the movable piece 222 is rotated based on the display result corresponding to the normal symbol display 322 being stopped, and the variable winning ball apparatus 210 is opened. Control. When the predetermined period has elapsed, the start opening solenoid 220 is moved again to rotate the movable piece 222, and the variable winning ball apparatus 210 is controlled to be closed. By controlling the variable winning ball device 210 to the open state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 214, and by controlling the variable winning ball device 210 to the closed state, it is difficult to enter the game ball. It becomes a state.

  In addition, when a game ball flowing down the game area 37 enters the first start port 212 or the second start port 214, the special symbol display unit 302 can start a special symbol variation display (for example, a big hit) If the game is not being played and the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed, the special symbol display unit 302 starts to display the special symbol, and the effect display device 202 uses the predetermined decorative symbol. Display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 302 and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 202 are stopped after a predetermined period of time.

  In this embodiment, two starting ports, a first starting port 212 and a second starting port 214 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 210, are provided as winning ports for which the variation display of special symbols is permitted. The number of start ports provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 210 is not limited to these, and for example, only one of the first start port 212 and the second start port 214 may be provided. Further, a game ball enters the first start port 212 and is detected by the first start port sensor 216, and a game ball enters the second start port 214 and is detected by the second start port sensor 218. Based on this, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 212 and is detected by the first start port sensor 216, and when a game ball enters the second start port 214, the second start port sensor 218. A different number of game balls may be paid out when a game ball is detected by. For example, when a game ball enters the first start port 212 and is detected by the first start port sensor 216, three game balls are paid out, and a game ball enters the second start port 214, When game balls are detected by the second start port sensor 218, four game balls may be paid out.

  When a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 216 and the second start port sensor 218, the hit determination random number is extracted from a counter that updates the hit determination random number within a predetermined range. Also, when the special symbol display 302 starts to display the variation of the special symbol (and when the effect display device 202 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol), based on the hit determination random number (15R big hit 2R big hit, small hit), the LED of the special symbol display 302 is controlled to be turned on in a manner corresponding to the determination result as a result of the variable display, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the effect display device 202. Derived display. Specifically, when it is determined to be a hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit, small hit), the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are turned on and displayed in a specific manner, and the effect display device 202 is displayed. The specific display result of the decorative design is derived and displayed on the screen. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is out of place, the four LEDs of the special symbol display unit 302 are turned on and displayed in a mode (out-of-band design) different from the specific mode, and the effect display device 202 displays a display result that is in a shifted state. (Out of symbol: non-specific display result, in this embodiment, a combination of at least two types of identification information (design)) is derived and displayed. Thus, the display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 302 corresponds to the display result of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 202.

  Also, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 202 are symbols for effects different from the special symbols that are variably displayed on the special symbol display 302. The contents are displayed to the player with the effect being further enhanced by using the decorative design for the effect. That is, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a specific manner, transition control is made to the big hit gaming state (15R big hit gaming state, 2R big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state. Even if the display result of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 202 becomes the specific display result, if the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit in a manner different from the specific manner, the big hit gaming state and the small hit state Transition control to the gaming state is not performed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the specific mode to be lit and displayed by the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 is a special mode (probability variable symbol), a non-special mode (non-probability variable symbol) different from the special mode, The special mode (small hit design) is included, and the special mode (probability variable design) includes the high-profit special mode (15R-probability design) and the low-profit special mode (2R-probability design), and the non-special mode ( The non-probable symbol) includes a low-profit non-special aspect (2R non-probable symbol).

  When the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in the high profit special mode (15R probability variation symbol) among the specific modes, the display result of the specific display result is displayed on the effect display device 202 as the display result of the decorative symbol. Among them, the high profit special display result (15R probability variable symbol: in this embodiment, the same symbol combination) is derived and displayed, and the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are selected from the low profit special mode (2R) in a specific mode. In the case of lighting display with the probability variation symbol), the low profit special display result among the specific display results (2R probability variation symbol (combination of a predetermined decoration symbol out of the loss symbol)) as the display result of the decoration symbol on the effect display device 202 In this embodiment, a combination of symbols including “1”, “2”, and “3” (for example, “213”) is derived and displayed.

  In addition, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a low-profit non-special mode (2R non-probable variation) among specific modes, the special display is displayed on the effect display device 202 as a display result of the decorative symbols. Of the results, the low profit non-special display result (2R non-probable variation (combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of symbols): In this embodiment, "1", "2" and " When a combination of symbols including “3” (for example, “213”, etc.) is derived and displayed, and the four LEDs of the special symbol indicator 302 are lit and displayed in a special mode (small hit symbol) among the specific modes. The special display result of the specific display result as the display result of the decoration symbol on the effect display device 202 (small hit symbol (combination of a predetermined decorative symbol out of the off symbol): in this embodiment, the 2R probability variable symbol and Combination of symbols including similar to the 2R non probability variation pattern as "1" and "2" to "3", for example, so as to derive display "213", etc.).

  In this embodiment, the low-profit special display result derived and displayed on the effect display device 202 when the low-profit special mode is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 302, and the low-profit non-special mode on the special symbol display 302 The low-profit non-special display result derived and displayed on the effect display device 202 when it is derived and displayed, and the special display derived and displayed on the effect display device 202 when the special mode is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 302 The result is a combination of the same symbols (a combination of symbols including “1”, “2”, and “3”, for example, “213”). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is viewing the effect display device 202 to determine whether the game state is a small hit game state or a 2R big hit game state, and it is a 2R probability variable big hit or a non-2R probability variable big hit. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is.

  When the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lighted and displayed in a special mode (high profit special mode and low profit special mode), the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state and higher than the normal state after the big hit gaming state is finished. High probability state that is determined to be a big hit with a probability (in this example, 10 times the probability of the normal state) (in this embodiment, a high probability state is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 31.925 in the high probability state, the normal state Then, it is controlled to be a big hit with a probability of 1 / 319.25. On the other hand, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lighted and displayed in a non-special mode (low-profit non-special mode), the high-probability state is not controlled.

  In addition, when four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a special mode (high profit special mode, low profit special mode) and non-special mode (low profit non-special mode) and controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the condition that a predetermined condition to be described later is satisfied, the normal symbol display 322 is used to display the fluctuation time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display after the big hit gaming state to the stop display of the special symbol. The variable time from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the stop display of the normal symbol is controlled to a time-short state that is shorter than the normal state.

  The decorative symbol variation display by the effect display device 202 is synchronized with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol indicator 302. Specifically, when the special symbol display unit 302 starts the special symbol variation display, the effect display device 202 starts the decorative symbol variation display, and the special symbol display unit 302 stops the special symbol display (the special symbol display). When the display result is derived and displayed), the effect display device 202 displays the decorative symbol in a stopped manner (the display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed). That is, the variation time of the special symbol by the special symbol display 302 and the variation time of the decorative symbol by the effect display device 202 are the same time, and the variation time of the special symbol by the special symbol display 302 is shortened in a short time state. Accordingly, the variation time of the decorative pattern by the effect display device 202 is also shortened.

  Further, in the time-saving state, the control is further performed to extend the opening time during which the second start port 214 is opened to the normal state (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds in the normal state and 5 seconds in the time-short state). Then, the control for increasing the probability that the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 322 is a hit (in this embodiment, the LED on the upper side of the normal symbol display 322 is turned on) is executed. The normal state is a gaming state different from the high probability state and the short time state.

  In addition, the time-short state control may be executed in parallel with the high-probability state control. In this case, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state, and the control in the short time state is executed, which is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the control in the short-time state is not executed in parallel with the control in the high-probability state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is the same as that in the normal state. Is also in a state advantageous to the player. Thus, in this embodiment, one of the high-probability short-time state in which the control in the high-probability state is executed in parallel as the short-time state and the low-probability short-time state in which the control in the high-probability state is not executed in parallel. To control.

  In addition, if the above-mentioned short-time state control is not executed in parallel with the high-probability state control being executed, the short-time state control is not executed, but the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than the normal state. Therefore, it is a state advantageous to the player. As described above, in this embodiment, one of the high-probability short-time state in which the control in the short-time state is executed in parallel as the high-probability state and the high-probability non-time-short state in which the control in the short-time state is not executed in parallel. To control. In the low-probability short-time state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is the same as that in the normal state. Therefore, the low-probability short-time state and the normal state may be collectively referred to as a low-probability state.

  In this embodiment, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a high profit special mode (15R probability variation symbol), the high probability short-time state is controlled after the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a low-profit special mode, when controlling to a high-probability short-time state according to the gaming state, and when controlling to a high-probability non-short-time state There is. Specifically, when exiting the jackpot gaming state, it is determined whether or not the termination condition of the short-time state described later is satisfied, and if the termination condition of the short-time state is not satisfied, control to a high probability short-time state, If the termination condition for the short-time state is satisfied, the high-probability non-short-time state is controlled.

  In addition, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a low-profit non-special mode (2R non-probable variation), the case of controlling to the low probability short-time state according to the gaming state and the normal state There is a case to control. Specifically, when ending the jackpot gaming state, it is determined whether or not a short-time state termination condition to be described later is satisfied, and if the short-time state termination condition is not satisfied, control to a low probability short-time state, If the termination condition for the short-time state is satisfied, the normal state is controlled. Moreover, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a low profit non-special mode (2R non-probable variation), the low probability short-time state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. In this case, when the special symbol display 302 executes the special symbol variable display a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), it is determined that the time-shortening termination condition is satisfied, and the control of the low-probability short-time state is terminated. To control the transition to the normal state.

  The low-profit special mode (2R probability variation symbol) includes a first low-profit special mode (2R probability variation symbol A) and a second low-profit special variation (2R probability variation symbol B). When the four LEDs 302 are lit and displayed in the second low-profit special mode (2R probability variation pattern B), when the high probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the big hit, the special symbol display 302 has a predetermined number of times ( In this example, when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times (when the time-short end condition is satisfied), the control in the high-probability short-time state is terminated and the transition control to the high-probability non-short-time state is performed. As described above, the first low-profit special mode is more advantageous to the player than the second low-profit special mode.

  In addition, not only in the above-described example, in the short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state), the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the special symbol display 302 and the effect display device 202 is shortened compared to the normal state. Control, control for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 322 from the normal state, control for increasing the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 322 becomes a hit, the variable prize One of the control for extending the opening time for the ball device 210 to be opened from the normal state, the control for increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 210 is opened to the normal state, or Any combination (or all) may be executed.

  Further, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a special mode (small hit symbol), the small symbol game state is controlled. Then, after the end of the small hit gaming state, the game state before the start of the small hit gaming state is continued. Specifically, if the high probability state control is executed before the small hit gaming state is started, the high probability state control is executed even after the small hit gaming state ends, and before the small hit gaming state is started. In the case where the time-short state control is being executed, the time-short state control is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state unless the time-short end condition is satisfied. For example, when the game state is the above high probability short-time state, if the short-term end condition is not satisfied when the small hit state is satisfied, control is made to the high-probability short-time state after the small hit game state, and the short-term end condition is satisfied. If it is (if the 100th special symbol fluctuation display is a small hit), the high probability non-time-short state is controlled after the small hit gaming state. That is, unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not directly attributable to a change in the gaming state, but simply gives an opportunity to get a prize ball.

  In this example, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (see FIGS. 37 to 40) corresponding to the three display areas of the effect display device 202 are stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. To be controlled. The stop symbol of this decorative symbol is a state in which all of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed when the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the left, middle and right decorative symbols start to change. This is a combination of symbols. In this example, the state where the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped at the same symbol when the variable display of the middle decorative symbol is not stopped is called the reach or reach state, and the reach state is reached. The effect display executed by the effect display device 202 from when the medium decoration symbol is stopped to displayed is called a reach effect.

  Further, during the execution of the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 302, or the execution of the big hit gaming state (15R big hit gaming state, 2R big hit gaming state) and the small hit gaming state, A winning determination random number extracted based on a game ball entering the second start port 214 and detected by the first start port sensor 216 or the second start port sensor 218 (predetermined condition is satisfied) is It is possible to store up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment), and the number of random numbers for hit determination (the number of special figure holding storage) stored is displayed by a special symbol holding display 304. As described above, the special symbol hold indicator 304 is constituted by four LEDs. In this example, turning on one LED indicates that the number of special figure hold memory is 1, indicating that turning on two LEDs indicates that the number of special figure hold memory is 2, 3 Turning on the LED indicates that the number of special figure hold memory is 3, and turning on the four LEDs indicates that the number of special figure hold memory is 4. In this way, the special symbol hold indicator 304 has a predetermined number of conditions (the game ball has entered the first start port 212 or the second start port 214), but the number of memories for which the special symbol variation display has not yet started. (Number of special figure hold storage) is displayed.

  In this example, in the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the fact that the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a specific manner, the opening / closing positions arranged on the left and right sides of the big winning opening 272 by the attacker solenoid 276 The member 274 is rotated to control an open state in which a game ball can enter the special winning opening 272. In addition, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in the high-profit special mode among the specific modes, the control is set to the 15R big hit game state, and the special winning opening 272 is controlled to the open state for a predetermined time. (For example, 30 seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the big prize opening 272, the attacker solenoid 276 again places them on the left and right sides of the big prize opening 272. The opening / closing member 274 is rotated to control the game ball in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the winning prize opening 272.

  One round in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state from controlling the game ball to an open state in which the game ball can enter the big winning port 272 until controlling the game ball to the closed state in which it is difficult to enter the big winning port 272 (1R), and in the 15R jackpot gaming state, the game ends when 15 rounds (15R) are executed.

  In addition, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in the low profit special mode and the low profit non-special mode among the specific modes, the 2R big hit gaming state is controlled and the big prize opening 272 is opened. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.3 seconds) has passed since the control, the open / close members 274 disposed on the left and right sides of the big prize opening 272 are rotated again by the attacker solenoid 276 and the game balls are put into the big prize opening 272. It is designed to control the closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball. In the 2R big hit gaming state, the game ends when two rounds (2R) are executed.

  In addition, when the four LEDs of the special symbol display 302 are lit and displayed in a special mode among the specific modes, the small winning game state is controlled, and the big prize opening 272 is controlled to be open for a predetermined time (for example, , 1.3 seconds), the movable pieces placed on the left and right sides of the big prize opening 272 are rotated again by the attacker solenoid 276 to control the game ball in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the big prize opening 272. It is like that. In the small hit gaming state, the game ends when two rounds (2R) are executed.

  The status indicator 306 controls driving in a predetermined manner according to the gaming state. Specifically, if the 15R big hit gaming state, the status indicator 306 is turned on and the 2R big hit gaming state is set. If there is, the status indicator 306 is blinked by turning it on and off at a predetermined interval, and if it is a small hit gaming state, the status indicator 306 is blinked by being turned on and off at an interval different from the predetermined interval. It should be noted that a display device such as an LED that is driven and controlled in accordance with the game state being executed among the normal state, the short time state, and the high probability state may be provided separately from the state indicator 306. . For example, when the normal state, that is, the time-short state control and the high-probability state control are not executed, the two LEDs are driven and controlled in the unlit state, and when the time-short state control is executed, 2 When one of the LEDs is driven and controlled in a lighting state, and the control of the high probability state is being executed, a display that controls driving of the other LED in the lighting state may be provided. In a normal state, an LED that is configured by a full-color LED is used to drive and control one LED in an unlit state, and when the time-short state control is executed independently, the drive control is performed in a green lit state. When the control in the high probability state is executed alone, the drive control is performed in the red lighting state, and when the control in the short time state and the control in the high probability state are executed in parallel, Table for driving control in flashing state Vessel may be provided.

  In this example, in the 2R big hit gaming state, the period from when the big winning opening 272 is opened to the closed state, and from the big winning opening 272 opened in the small hit gaming state to the closed state. Are the same (if they are indistinguishable (eg, within 100 ms), they are considered the same). In addition, in the 2R big hit gaming state, the waiting time until the big winning opening 272 is closed and then opened again, and in the small hit gaming state until the big winning opening 272 is closed and then opened again. The waiting time is the same (if it is indistinguishable (for example, a difference within 100 ms), it is regarded as the same). Therefore, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the game is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and the expectation for the high probability state is diminished when the small hit gaming state is grasped. , It can prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the state indicator 306 controls the driving in a predetermined manner according to the gaming state, but is not provided for actively notifying the player of the gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, since the status indicator 306 is arranged at the lower right end of the game area 37, the player who is paying attention to the effect display device 202 is driven and controlled by the status indicator 306. It is hard to notice. Also, in order not to inform the player of the correspondence between the driving mode of the status indicator 306 and the gaming state, even if it is noticed that the status indicator 306 is driven, the driving control is performed according to the gaming status. It is hard to notice. Further, in this example, after the 2R big hit gaming state is finished, the player is not notified whether to execute the control in the short time state or the control in the high probability state. Therefore, it becomes difficult to grasp the current game state, and it becomes difficult to stop the game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example includes the effect unit 318 that performs an effect operation using the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 272 of the attacker device 270. In this effect unit 318, after the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is highly likely to be changed from the normal state to the high probability state, or the high probability state continues. The player is made to recognize using the game ball that there is a high possibility of being played.

  Specifically, the determination of “2R big hit” or “small hit” is made based on a random number for winning determination extracted (lottery) by entering a game ball into the first starting port 212 or the second starting port 214. At that time, the opening / closing member 274 of the attacker device 270 is opened twice (two rounds), and the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 272 in the opened state is sent to the sorting device 330. At this time, up to five (or six) game balls are stored in the storage passage 356 of the sorting apparatus 330. Note that whether or not a game ball is stored in the storage passage 356 can be detected by an intrusion detection sensor 382.

  When two rounds of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are completed, the opening / closing member 274 is driven to make it impossible to enter the big winning opening 272, and the distribution motor 350 is driven to rotate. Then, only one game ball stored in the storage passage 356 is stored in the game ball storage portion 346 of the rotating body 348, and based on the hit determination random number, specifically, in the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state Based on whether or not to control to a high probability state after the end, it is distributed to one of the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340. The game balls may be distributed by the distribution device 330 during the round.

  The game ball distribution control by the distribution device 330 is controlled by a predetermined calculation process of the sub-integrated MPU 520 in the peripheral control board 92, and a predetermined control based on a hit determination random number sent from the main control board 94. When the command is received, a predetermined distribution determination random number is extracted according to the control command, and the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340 are extracted based on the distribution determination random number. It distributes to either.

  In the effect unit 318, as described above, when the game ball is distributed to the second distribution port 338, the probability that the game ball is received to the first reception port 410 is the highest. The probability of being accepted into the receiving port 410 is the lowest. And, for example, when the random number for determining the winning hit indicates “probable big hit” such as “2R probable big hit A” or “2R probable big hit B”, and in the case of executing the control in the high probability state, the small hit game When the state is reached, the game balls are distributed to the second distribution port 338 so that the game balls are received to the first reception port 410 with high probability. That is, if the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 272 is received by the first receiving port 410 after the round of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the probability is high after the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished. This suggests that the control of the state (probability change state) is highly likely to be executed.

  Note that when executing the control of the high probability state after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the game balls are not necessarily distributed to the second distribution port 338. Depending on the extracted random number for determination of distribution, it is also distributed to the first distribution port 336 and the third distribution port 340.

  On the other hand, for example, when the control of the high probability state is not executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the third distribution port 340 or the The game balls are distributed to the first distribution port 336.

  By the way, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution device 330, various light emission means 314 are controlled to emit light by the sub-integrated MPU 520, and an effective light emission effect that can enhance interest is performed. For example, if there is a high possibility that a game ball will be received at the first receiving port 410, the character decoration body 312d simulating a golf ball may be emitted in various colors, and the game ball may be received at the first receiving port 410. It suggests that the nature is high, and it is possible to enhance interest. Alternatively, when allocating to the first distribution port 336, the LED of the light emitting means 314 behind the flowing water pattern-like background decoration 312e is blinked so that the light flows from the upper side to the lower side, The game balls distributed to the mouth 336 are rolled by a rolling guide rail 434 so as to follow the light flow of the light emitting means 314, so that the expectation can be enhanced.

  As a result, when “probability big hit” is drawn by winning the starting prize of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 272 during the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 274 of the attacker device 270 becomes the game ball effect space 308. Since the game ball is received in the first receiving port 410, it can be made to appear that the lottery probability has been changed to a high probability state. Since the game ball is directly received in the first receiving port 410 in comparison with the one using the production image, the player can be surely recognized as “probable big hit”, and the physical security It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player strongly desires that the “probability big hit” is drawn and the lottery probability is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball whose lottery probability is changed when the game ball is received at the first receiving port 410. Since it is directed by, it can be expected to be received in the first receiving port 410, and it becomes possible to be thrilled and throbbing depending on whether or not the gaming ball is received in the first receiving port 410, game balls However, even if it is distributed to any of the distribution ports 336, 338, and 340, the interest can be enhanced.

[About various control processes of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 94 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and power-on processing and then timer interrupt processing will be described in order. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process of FIG.

[About random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and an initial value determination random number for hit determination used to determine the initial value of the hit determination random number And a random number for determining the value to be used for determining the hit type, a random number for determining the reach when determining whether or not to generate a reach when the big hit gaming state is not generated, and the special symbol shown in FIG. The winning symbol used to determine the combination of the random symbol for the variable display pattern used for determining the variable display pattern to be displayed on the display 302 and the special symbol to be displayed on the special symbol display 302 when the big hit gaming state is generated. A random number for determining the initial value for the winning symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for the winning symbol, and the like are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol per-determining random number used for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece 222 of the second starting port 214 and the normal per-symbol determining random number shown in FIG. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol used for determining the initial value of the normal symbol, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern displayed on the ordinary symbol display 322 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

[About power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 performs power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the power-on process is started, the main control MPU 504 sets an interrupt mode (step S2010). This interrupt mode sets the priority order of interrupts of the main control MPU 504. In the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when this timer interrupt processing interrupt occurs, the main control MPU 504 preferentially performs timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S2010, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S2012). In this I / O input / output setting, the I / O setting of the main control MPU 504 is performed. For example, the terminal that outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 276 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 274 shown in FIG. 23 is set as an output terminal (Output). On the other hand, a terminal to which a detection signal from a count switch 278 that detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 272 is input is set as an input terminal (Input).

  Subsequent to step S2012, the watchdog timer built in the main control MPU 504 is set to be valid (step S2014). This watchdog timer is for monitoring the operation (system) of the main control MPU 504, and resets the main control MPU 504 when it is not cleared within a certain period of time (periodically checks whether the system of the main control MPU 504 is out of control). Diagnosis).

  Following step S2014, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S2016). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. A power failure warning signal is input when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

  Subsequent to step S2016, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 94a is operated (step S2018). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 94a of the main control board 94 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 504. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 94a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 94a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 94a is operated in step S2018, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S2020). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 94a is not operated in step S2018, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S2022). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates game information relating to games such as probability fluctuation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 504. This flag indicates whether or not to erase, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S2020 and step S2022 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 504.

  As described above, the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 272 are stored in the sorting device 330. In this state, for example, even if it is difficult to progress the game due to the influence of noise, for example, the game ball stored in the sorting device 330 by operating the RAM clear switch 94a by the store clerk in the hall is detailed. As will be described later, it is automatically discharged from the middle route (it is automatically guided to the game ball effect space 308 by being distributed to the second distribution port 338). For this reason, it is not necessary to open the front frame 4, which is a glass door, from the main body frame 3 and manually remove the game balls stored in the sorting device 330. Therefore, it is possible to remove the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 272 and stored in the sorting apparatus 330 without taking time and effort.

  Following step S2020 or step S2022, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S2024). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 202 by the liquid crystal control board 528 shown in FIG. For example, an opening image compressed from a liquid crystal control ROM (not shown) provided on the liquid crystal control board 528 is read out and stored in a RAM built in a liquid crystal control MPU (not shown). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S2024, setting for permitting access to the built-in RAM is performed (step S2026). With this setting, the internal RAM can be accessed, and for example, game information can be written (stored) or read.

  Subsequent to step S2026, the stack pointer is set (step S2028). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. This indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S2028, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are loaded on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Following step S2028, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S2030). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing game information and a value 0 when not erasing game information.

  When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S2030, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S2032). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum (sum value).

  Subsequent to step S2032, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches a checksum value (sum value) stored in power-off processing (power-off) described later. (Step S2034). If the sum values match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is a value 1 (step S2036). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not backup information such as game information, a checksum value, and a backup flag BK-FLG value is stored in the built-in RAM in a power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the power-off process is performed, and a value of 0 is set when the power-off process is not performed.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 in step S2036, that is, when the power-off process is performed, the work area of the internal RAM is set as the power recovery (step S2038). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to the value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as “built-in ROM”) built in the main control MPU 504. Is set in the work area of the internal RAM. Here, “at power recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is turned on, and also a state in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  Subsequent to step S2038, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S2040). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S2030, that is, when the game information is deleted, or the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S2034 ( When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S2036, that is, when the power-off process is not performed, the entire area of the internal RAM is cleared (step S2042). Then, the work area of the internal RAM is set as an initial setting (step S2044). In this setting, initial information is read from the built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S2044, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S2046). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the peripheral control board 92 shown in FIG. Test commands for performing various tests are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the built-in RAM.

  Here, even when there is a game ball stored in the sorting device 330 shown in FIG. 29 when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the game ball stored in the sorting device 330 is automatically transmitted from the above-described middle route. (It is automatically guided to the game ball effect space 308 after being distributed to the second distribution port 338). Therefore, in the case where the game information stored in the built-in RAM of the main control board 94 is destroyed due to the influence of noise and a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the sorting device can be operated without operating the RAM clear switch 94a. The game balls stored in 330 can be removed. This eliminates the need for the player to call the hall clerk to open the glass door (front frame 4) from the main body frame 3 and have the game balls stored in the sorting device 330 removed. After starting up, the game can be started immediately.

  When the peripheral control board 92 receives the RAM clear notification command, the RAM clear notification command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 528, and when the test command is received, test commands for performing various inspections are shown in FIG. The data is transmitted to the sound source IC 524, the liquid crystal control board 528, and the lamp driving board 532.

  Subsequent to step S2040 or step S2046, interrupt initialization is performed (step S2048). This setting sets an interrupt cycle when timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S2048, interrupt permission is set. (Step S2050). With this setting, the timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S2048, that is, every 4 ms.

  Following step S2050, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input (step S2054). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S2054 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S2054, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S2056). In this non-winning random number update process, the hit determination initial value determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, the win symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. For example, the counter that updates the hit determination random number increases (counts up) the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the hit determination random number by 1 each time a timer interrupt process described later is performed. When a random number for determining an initial value for hit determination is set (updated) by non-winning random number update processing, this counter counts up from the random number for determining an initial value for hit determination to an upper limit value, and then hits from the lower limit value. Counts up to a random number for determining the initial value for determination. Then, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (winning determination) are updated. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process. The random number for normal symbol determination is the same as the method for updating the random number for hit determination described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S2056, the process returns to step S2054 again to determine whether or not there is a power failure warning signal. If there is no power failure warning signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S2056, and steps S2054 to S2056. Repeat. The processing from step S2054 to step S2056 is referred to as “main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S2054, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S2058). With this setting, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S2058, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S2060). This checksum calculates the sum (sum value) by regarding the game information in the work area of the built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the backup flag BK-FLG value.

  Subsequent to step S2060, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 (step S2062). Thereby, the storage of the backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S2062, prohibition of access to the built-in RAM is set (step S2064). With this setting, access to the internal RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and the backup information stored in the internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S2064, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the main control MPU 504 is reset, and then the main control MPU 504 performs this power-on process again. The processing from step S2058 to step S2064 and the infinite loop are referred to as “power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 504) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a power-on process when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S2034, it is inspected whether the backup information stored in the built-in RAM is normal. In step S2036, it is inspected whether the power-off process has been performed. In this way, the backup information stored in the built-in RAM is checked twice to check whether the backup information is stored by fraud.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, the gate sensor 206, the first starting port sensor 216, the second starting port sensor 218, the count sensor 278, each general winning port sensor 226, the total winning port winning number counting sensor 508, etc. The detection signal from is input. Then, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above random numbers, random numbers related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol (a random number for winning determination, a random number for determining a given value, a normal symbol per determining symbol) The random number counter is operated in such a manner that (random number) is updated.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively performed based on the special symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 504. Will be executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to winning when the movable piece 222 is activated as a process of step S15. This normal symbol process will be described later, but here again, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 executes the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 222 becomes higher after the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 2R big hit gaming state) is completed. (So-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the time required for the normal symbol variation display control is shortened by a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the opening time of the movable piece 222 is extended to shorten the time-saving state. Is to be realized.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM to the peripheral substrate 502 or the like is performed. In the special symbol command control process in step S16, a game ball is entered based on the detection signals of the first start port sensor 216, the second start port sensor 218, and the count sensor 278 in the switch process in step S12. Processing for transmitting a command indicating the detection to the peripheral substrate 502 or the like is also performed. For example, when a game ball entering the grand prize opening 272 is detected based on the detection signal of the count sensor 278, a process of transmitting a count detection command to the peripheral board 502 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral board 502, for example, is performed.

  Also, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 outputs information such as hit information (15R big hit, 2R big hit, small hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18 next. Process.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 performs the processing of step S19 such as the first start port sensor 216, the second start port sensor 218, the count sensor 278, each general winning port sensor 226, etc. When the detection signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 133 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 512 mounted on the payout control board 133 outputs a driving signal from the payout control I / O port 514 to the ball payout device 125, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved memories as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the actuator is controlled (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24).

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 advances the game by performing the timer interrupt process every 4 ms. The various processes to be described in detail use sequential flowcharts in order to easily explain the specifications of the pachinko machine 1.

[Special symbol process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 51, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first has the first start port sensor 216 or Under the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 218 is in an ON state (the ball enters the start port) (step S30), for example, a random number for determining the hit of a special symbol is obtained from the random number counter. Is executed in the RAM (step S40). Thereafter, one of the following eight process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the above-described special symbol process flag.

  1. Reads random numbers for special symbol hit determination, assigned value determination random numbers, etc. stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 504, and draws the display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped based on the read hit determination random numbers Special symbol normal processing (step S50)

  2. Based on the determination value for the jackpot type based on the above-mentioned random number for determining the assigned value, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the special symbol is stopped and the result of the determination process for the type of jackpot Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S51) in which the process of determining the mode when the variable control is stopped is performed.

  3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 302 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 202 corresponding to the special symbol Variation pattern setting process (step S52)

  4). Special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 302 is stopped (step S53).

  5. The special symbol display 302 displays the special symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped and the result of the determination process for the type of jackpot. Special symbol stop process for stopping the variation display of the special symbol as described above (step S54)

  6). When the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the special symbol variable display stop becomes a predetermined specific mode (15R big hit, 2R big hit, small hit), it shifts to the above big hit gaming state and small hit gaming state A pre-opening process for the big prize opening that waits until the peripheral board 502 is notified to the player that the game is to be performed (step S55).

  7. When the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the special symbol variable display stop becomes a predetermined specific mode (15R big hit, 2R big hit, small hit), the big prize opening 272 is opened by the attacker device 270. Processing for opening a special winning opening controlled by the state (step S56)

  8). The big winning opening opening post-process that waits until the peripheral board 502 notifies the player that the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished (step S57).

  Next, specific aspects of the start-port passing process (step S40) and these eight process processes (steps S50 to S57) will be described in detail separately for those processes.

[Starting port passage processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the start port passage processing (step S40).

  Now, in the process of step S30, the first start port sensor 216 or the second start port sensor 218 is in an on state, and a game ball enters the first start port 212 or the second start port 214. If it is determined that there is, as shown in FIG. 52, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first calculates the counter value by the special holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 504 as the process of step S41. get. Then, based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S42 to S44 are performed to newly put the special symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the special reservation number counter is counted up. Next, as the processing of step S43, the hit determination random number and the assigned value determination random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S44, each random number thus obtained is stored in a random number storage area corresponding to the counter value by the special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 504.

  However, in the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of reserved special symbols is the maximum value, the special symbol variation display control is not newly suspended. In other words, this processing is terminated when it is determined that the number of special symbols held is the maximum value without changing the special symbol variable display control to a new holding state.

[Regarding special symbol normal processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol normal process (step S50).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 53, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S101. The main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 determines whether or not there is a variable symbol display control of the special symbol in the holding state based on the counter value by the special holding number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the special symbol that is in the hold state, then as the processing of step S102, the special symbol stored in the random number storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 504 is processed. Of the random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped (for example, a random number for determining hits, a random number for determining assigned value), the random number stored first is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the special reserved number counter is counted down and the display state at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbol stored in the random number storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 504 is concerned. Random numbers are shifted in a first-in first-out manner. As a result, the suspension of the special symbol variable display control is released.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a lottery process for the winning of the small hit and the big hit is performed based on the read random number for determining the hit of the special symbol. In the lottery process, the read hit determination random number is compared with a hit determination value (not shown) stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 504. Then, as a result of the comparison, when the read hit determination random number matches the hit determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is being set is set (step S107). On the other hand, when the read hit determination random number matches the hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won (step S108), the main control MPU 504 is in the small hit state. The small hit flag shown is set (step S109). Normally, when the big symbol flag or the small symbol flag is set in this way, and then the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S51) (step S110), This process ends. However, there are cases where the read hit determination random number coincides with a hit determination value indicating that the hit random number does not correspond to either the small hit or the big hit, and in this case, it matches the determination value. At that time, the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S51).

[Random numbers for hit determination at low probability and high probability]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, only 1277 types of random numbers for the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination are prepared. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), in the ROM of the main control MPU 504, at the time of low probability (normal state and short time of low probability), seven kinds of random numbers are won on the small hit. So that the four types of random number values match the hit determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the 1266 types of random number values match the hit determination value indicating that the above-mentioned deviation is not true. Each of the hit determination values is registered. Also, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), at the time of high probability (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state), the 7 types of random number values coincide with the hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won. The hit determination values are registered so that the 40 random number values coincide with the hit determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the 1230 random number values match the hit determination value indicating that they are out of place. ing. As described above, in this embodiment, the hit determination table used at the time of high probability (high probability hit determination table) is the jackpot set in the hit determination table (low probability hit determination table) used at low probability. 10 times the number of hit determination values indicating that the player has won is set, and when the probability is high, the probability of winning the jackpot is increased to 10 times that when the probability is low.

  In this embodiment, the winning judgment table used at the time of high probability (high probability time per hit judgment table) is won for the small hit set in the hit judgment table used at low probability (low probability time per hit judgment table). The same judgment value as the hit judgment value is set, and the probability of winning a small hit at the high probability is the same as the probability of winning the small hit at the low probability, but not limited to this, it is used at the high probability The number of winning judgment values indicating winning in the small hit set in the winning judgment table, the number of winning judgment values indicating winning in the hit determining table used in the low probability, By making different, the probability of winning a small hit at a high probability and the probability of winning a small hit at a low probability may be different. For example, a hit judgment value that indicates that a larger number of small hits are won than a hit judgment value that indicates that the small hits set in the hit judgment table used at the low probability are won in the hit judgment table used at the high probability. By setting, it may be configured to increase the probability of winning a small hit at a high probability than at a low probability, or a hit determination table used at a low probability to By setting a hit judgment value that indicates that you have won a smaller number of small hits than the hit judgment value that indicates that you have won for the set small hit, you win a small hit at a high probability than at a low probability You may comprise so that a probability may be reduced.

[Special symbol stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S51).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 55, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first changes the special symbol. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the display is stopped is determined. The lottery process is determined by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S121) and whether the small hit flag is set (step S124).

  If the jackpot flag is set, main control MPU 504 determines the jackpot type based on the assigned value determination random number and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 56 (step S122). The big hit type determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 504. As shown in FIG.

  1. 15R jackpot gaming state is controlled, and after the 15R jackpot gaming state, the 15R probability variable jackpot is controlled to the high probability short-time state.

  2.2R jackpot game state is controlled, and if the above-mentioned short-time end condition is not satisfied after the end of the 2R jackpot game state, the 2R probability variable jackpot A is controlled to the high probability short-time state.

  3. Control to 2R jackpot gaming state, and if the above-mentioned short-time end condition is not satisfied after the end of 2R jackpot gaming state, control to the high-probability time-short state, and a special number of times (100 in this example) is controlled by the special symbol display 302. 2R probability variation big hit B that controls the transition to the high probability non-time-short state when the special symbol fluctuation display is executed

4. Control to the 2R jackpot gaming state, and if the above-mentioned time-short end condition is not satisfied after the 2R jackpot gaming state is finished, control to the low-probability time-shorting state, and the special symbol display 302 performs a predetermined number of times (100 in this example). When the special symbol fluctuation display is executed, it is decided to be one of the four types of big hits of 2R non-probable big hits that are controlled to shift to the normal state, and the special symbol fluctuation control according to the decided big hit types A mode at the time of stop (a stop symbol of a special symbol) is determined (step S123).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only 200 kinds of values of the assigned value determination random numbers are prepared. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56, in the ROM of the main control MPU 504, 122 types of random values are coincident with the assigned value judgment value indicating that the 15R probability variation is won, and 14 types of random values are stored. It matches the assigned value judgment value indicating that the 2R probability variable big hit A has been won, the 12 types of random number values match the assigned value judgment value that shows that the 2R probability variable big hit B has been won, and the 52 types of random number values are not 2R. The assigned value determination values are registered so as to coincide with the assigned value determination values indicating that the winning probabilities have been won. In addition, when the big hit, the ratio of occurrence of big hits (15R positive change big hit, 2R positive change big hit A, 2R positive change big hit B) for executing the control in the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends is set to 74%. In this case, the ratio of occurrence of big hits (2R non-probable big hits) that do not execute the control in the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set to 26%.

  Further, if the small hit flag is set (step S124), the main control MPU 504 determines the special symbol variation control stop mode (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the small hit (step S125).

  In addition, if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, the main control MPU 504 determines a mode (a special symbol stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the special symbol according to the loss (step S126).

  Here, the determination process for the special symbol variation control stop mode (special symbol stop symbol) is performed based on the given value determination random number. FIG. 57 is a list chart showing the mode when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. In this symbol determination table, the numbers “1 to 4” indicate the four LEDs (7-segment LED and dot LED) constituting the special symbol display 302.

  A lottery result based on the winning judgment random number and the assigned value determination random number (big hit type (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable variation big hit), small Corresponding to each of them, a plurality of types of display mode information (information indicating the display mode (lighting and extinguishing of four LEDs) at the time of suspension display of the special symbol) is associated, and each display mode information is It is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 504 in association with the random number for determining added value. That is, the assigned value determination value is associated with the display mode information, and is distributed according to the ratio shown in the jackpot type determination table. More specifically, among the special symbol stop symbols shown in FIG. 57, 15R probability variation jackpot symbols are associated with 122 types of assigned value judgment values, and 2R probability variation jackpot A symbols are associated with 14 types of assigned value. Determination values are associated with each other, 12R assigned value determination values are associated with 2R probability variation jackpot symbol B, and 52 types of assigned value determination values are associated with 2R non-probability variation jackpot symbol. Therefore, the type of jackpot is determined by determining the mode when the special symbol is stopped based on the assigned value judgment value.

  Then, after the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, as the process of step S128, these lottery results (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit or out of place are calculated. A command is set so that a decision item (a special symbol stop symbol or the like) based on the lottery result is transmitted to the peripheral board 502. Thereafter, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variation pattern setting process (step S52) as the process of step S129, this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol normal process is configured to determine whether or not the big hit and the small hit are made using the same hit determination random number in step S105. A random number used for determining whether or not to be used and a random number used for determining whether or not to make a small hit may be provided individually.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variation pattern setting process (step S52).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 58, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S141. The random number for the variation display pattern is acquired from the random number counter. When the jackpot flag is set (step S142), the lottery process for the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation mode) is performed based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S143). ). Here, the lottery process for the special symbol fluctuation pattern is performed based on the big hit hour fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 504. In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit is provided separately for 15R big hit (15R probability variation big hit) and 2R big hit (2R positive variation big hit A, 2R positive variation big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit), and in step S143, 15R big hit If there is, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the 15R big hit fluctuation pattern table, and if the 2R big hit, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the 2R big hit fluctuation pattern table. Here, in this table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol is stored in association with each of the variation display pattern random numbers. ing. In this respect, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 according to this embodiment acquires the variation time information associated with the acquired variable display pattern random number from the table, thereby obtaining the special control. Determine the pattern variation pattern. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed.

  Further, in the process of step S142, when the big hit flag is not set and the small hit flag is set (step S144), the special symbol is based on the obtained random number for variable display pattern. The lottery process for the fluctuation pattern is performed (step S145). However, here, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 504. Here, in this table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol is stored in association with each of the variation display pattern random numbers. ing. In this respect, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 according to this embodiment acquires the variation time information associated with the acquired variable display pattern random number from the table, thereby obtaining the special control. Determine the pattern variation pattern. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed.

  In addition, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set in step S142 and step S144, the fluctuation time from the start of the special symbol change display to the stop display of the special symbol is shortened from the normal state. It is determined whether or not control of the short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) is executed (step S146). Whether or not the time-short state control is being executed is determined by determining whether or not a time-short flag, which will be described later, is on. That is, the time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the control of the time reduction state is being executed. If the time reduction flag is on, it is determined that the control of the time reduction state is being executed, and if the time reduction flag is not on, It is determined that the control of the time reduction state is not being executed (if the time reduction flag is off). Then, if the time-short state control is executed, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is shorter than the normal state so that the change time is shorter (step S147). The variation pattern is determined (step S148).

  In this embodiment, when the short-time state control is executed and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, that is, in the case of a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time shorter than the normal state is determined. However, when the short-time state control is executed, even when the big hit and the small hit, the short-time state control is not executed among the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the big hit or the small hit. You may make it determine to the variation pattern in which the variation time shorter than the determined variation pattern is set.

  When the lottery process for the special symbol variation pattern is performed in this way, the special symbol variation display control in the special symbol display unit 302 is started as the processing of step S149, and the determined special symbol is determined. Is set as a command (variation pattern command) to the peripheral substrate 502, and the variation time of the determined variation pattern is set in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, effect control is performed in the effect display device 202 for the variation time thus determined. When the special symbol variable display control is started, it is next determined as a process of step S151 whether or not a limited time shortening flag, which will be described later, is on. The limited time reduction flag is a flag indicating that there is a limitation in the period for executing the control in the time reduction state. In this embodiment, it is shown that the period for executing the control in the short time state is limited to the period until the variable display is executed 100 times on the special symbol display 302. And if the time limit flag is on, after the time counter is counted down to count the number of variable displays that can execute the control in the time-saving state (the number of variable displays executed by the special symbol display 302). (Step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is “0” (Step S153). As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the control of the time reduction state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in step S151 that the time limit flag is not turned on, or if it is determined in step S153 that the time counter is not “0”, at that point, step S155 is performed. Move on to processing. Then, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the special symbol variation processing (step S53) (step S155), this processing is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the control of the short time state is started, the number of variable displays that can execute the control of the short time state, that is, the remaining number of variable displays that can execute the control of the short time state is 100 times. Set the counter to count the remaining number of variable displays that can be controlled in the short-time state by counting down the time-count counter every time the special symbol fluctuation display is started during the short-time state control. It is configured to determine that the control of the time reduction state is terminated when the counter reaches “0”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value (for example, 0) is set, and the time counter is incremented every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started during execution of control of the time reduction state. It may be configured to determine to end the control of the time reduction state when it reaches the 100) when set to 0 as an initial value.

[Special symbol variation processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol variation process (step S53).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 59, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S171. 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S52) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the special symbol stop process (step S54), this process is terminated.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the special symbol stop process (step S54).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 60, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S181. Display control for causing the special symbol display 302 to display the stop symbol determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process and derivation of a display result corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol on the effect display device 202 A stop display command for instructing display is set as a command to the peripheral substrate 502 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 turns off the time shortening flag and turns off the time limit shortening flag after the time shortening end flag is turned off (step S184) when the time shortening end flag is set (step S183). (Step S185). As a result, the time-short state control is terminated.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S55) (step S189), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable variation big hit). In step S187, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot A, 2R probability variation jackpot B, 2R non-probability jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit designated by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like. The interval timer is set with a waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit.

  If the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set (step S190), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S191). The waiting time until the start of the gaming state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S55) (step S189), this process is terminated. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502. Thereby, the effect of the small hit gaming state is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like.

  Note that the same time as the waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the same big hit may be set as the waiting time until the start of the small hit gaming state set in the interval timer. For example, when starting 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probability big hit and small hit, a common waiting time may be set in the interval timer.

  If the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set (step S190), the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the special symbol normal process (step S50) (step S193). This process is terminated.

[About the pre-opening for the big prize opening]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S55).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the pre-opening process for the special winning opening should be performed, as shown in FIG. 61, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S201. 1 is subtracted from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the special winning opening 272 is opened by the attacker device 270, and the interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed. A determination is made (step S202).

  When the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets a round start command indicating that the big hit gaming state round is started if the big hit (step S203) (step S203). S204). The round start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable variation big hit) and the round to be executed. ing. In step S204, a round start command is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) and the round to be executed (one round in step S204). Thereby, the effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the round start command and the round to be executed is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like.

  As a round start command (15R big hit round start command) of 15R big hit (15R big hit round start command), 15R big hit 1 round start command, 15R big hit 2 round start command, 15R big hit 3 round start command, 15R big hit 4 round start command, 15R jackpot 5 round start command, 15R jackpot 6 round start command, 15R jackpot 7 round start command, 15R jackpot 8 round start command, 15R jackpot 9 round start command, 15R jackpot 10 round start command, 15R jackpot 11 round start command, 15R A jackpot 12 round start command, 15R jackpot 13 round start command, 15R jackpot 14 round start command, and 15R jackpot 15 round start command are prepared To have. In addition, 2R big hit 1 round start command and 2R big hit 2 round start command are prepared as round start commands (2R big hit round start command) of 2R big hit (2R positive variation big hit A, 2R positive variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit). Yes. That is, a common command is used as a round start command corresponding to a big hit with the same number of rounds to be executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets the number of round executions according to the type of jackpot in the opening counter (step S205), and the opening time according to the type of jackpot (by the attacker device 270, the big winning mouth The time from when 272 is controlled to the open state until it is controlled to the closed state is set in the open timer (step S206). The release timer is set with a common release time as an open time corresponding to the same big number of rounds to be executed, for example, a common release time according to 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B and 2R non-probable big hit. Is set to the release timer.

  Further, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 starts a round of the small hit gaming state if the big hit is not made when the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed, that is, if the small hit is made. The round start command shown is set (step S207). The round start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502. Thereby, the effect of the small hit gaming state according to the small hit round instructed by the round start command is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like. Note that as a small hit round start command (small hit round start command), a small hit one round start command and a small hit two round start command are prepared.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets the number of rounds executed in accordance with the small hit (in this example, two times) in the release counter (step S208), and the release time (attacker) corresponding to the small hit. The opening time is set in the opening timer (time from when the prize winning opening 272 is controlled to the open state by the device 270 until it is controlled to the closed state) (step S209). Note that the release timer is set with a release time corresponding to the same big hit as the number of rounds to be executed and a common release time. For example, 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit and small hit are common. The release time is set in the release timer.

  When the above setting process is completed, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 decrements the release counter by 1 (step S210), and sets a pitch counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 272. It is set to 0 (step S211), and the attacker device 270 is driven to control the special winning opening 272 to be opened (step S212). Thereafter, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process for opening the special prize opening (step S56) (step S213), the process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the interval timer is not 0, that is, the standby time set in the interval timer has not elapsed, the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

[Regarding processing during opening of the big prize opening]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S56). Note that, as described above, the process for opening the special winning opening is performed by repeatedly executing the round game.

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special winning opening opening process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 62, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S221. Then, based on the detection signal from the count sensor 278, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 272. Then, on the condition that there is this entry, as a process of step S222, the entry counter that counts the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening 272 as a counter value is counted up, and the value of the entry counter is If it is 10 or more (step S223), the process proceeds to step S226, and processing for ending the round is performed.

  If the value of the winning counter is less than 10, the opening timer is decremented by 1 (step S224), and the opening timer value is 0, that is, the opening time of the big winning opening 272 set in the opening timer has elapsed. In that case (step S225), the attacker device 270 is driven to control the special winning opening 272 to be closed (step S226). Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 determines whether or not the open counter is 0, that is, whether or not the number of rounds set according to the type of big hit and the number of small hits has ended (step S227).

  When the release counter is 0 and the big hit gaming state is being executed (step S228), the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets a big hit end command (step S229). The jackpot end command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable variation big hit).

  In step S229, when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end command (15R probability variation jackpot end command) corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot is set, and when ending the 2R jackpot gaming state, the type of jackpot (2R probability variation) is set. A big hit end command (2R accurate variable big hit A end command, 2R positive variable big hit B end command, 2R non-probable big hit end command) according to big hit A, 2R positive variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) is set. Thereby, an effect when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit type is ended is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets an end standby time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the interval timer (step S230), and the process shifts to the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S57). When the above-described special symbol process flag is updated (step S231), this process is terminated. The interval timer is set to a common end waiting time as an end waiting time corresponding to the same big number of rounds to be executed, for example, 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, and 2R non-probable big hit. The end waiting time is set in the interval timer.

  If the small hit game state is executed when the open / close counter is 0 in step S227 (step S228), the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets a small hit end command (step S232). ). The small hit end command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502. Thereby, the effect when the small hit gaming state is ended is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets an end waiting time corresponding to the small hit in the interval timer (step S233), and the process is shifted to the post-opening process for the big winning opening (step S57). When the special symbol process flag is updated (step S231), this process is terminated. The interval timer is set with an end waiting time corresponding to the same big number of rounds to be executed and a common end waiting time, for example, depending on 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit and small hit. Common end waiting time is set in the interval timer.

  If the open / close counter is not 0 in step S227 and the big hit gaming state is being executed (step S234), a round end command is set (step S235). The round end command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable variation big hit) and the round to be finished. ing. In step S235, a round end command is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) and the round to be executed. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the round end command and the round to be ended is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like.

  As a round end command (15R big hit round end command) of 15R big hit (15R big hit round end command), 15R big hit 1 round end command, 15R big hit 2 round end command, 15R big hit 3 round end command, 15R big hit 4 round end command, 15R jackpot 5 round finish command, 15R jackpot 6 round finish command, 15R jackpot 7 round finish command, 15R jackpot 8 round finish command, 15R jackpot 9 round finish command, 15R jackpot 10 round finish command, 15R jackpot 11 round finish command, 15R A big hit 12 round end command, a 15R big hit 13 round end command, and a 15R big hit 14 round end command are prepared. In addition, as a round end command (2R big hit round end command) of 2R big hit (2R big change big hit A, 2R right variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit), a 2R big hit one round end command is prepared. That is, a common command is used as a round end command corresponding to a big hit with the same number of rounds to be executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 controls the round waiting time corresponding to the type of jackpot (the attacker device 270 controls the grand prize winning opening 272 to the closed state and then again controls the big winning prize opening 272 to the open state. Time) is set in the interval timer (step S236), and when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the post-winning-game opening post-processing (step S57) (step S231), this processing is performed. Exit. It should be noted that the interval timer is set with a common round waiting time as a round waiting time corresponding to the same big number of rounds to be executed, for example, 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B and 2R non-probable big hit The round waiting time is set in the interval timer.

  In addition, when the open / close counter is not 0 in step S227 and the small hit gaming state is executed (step S234), a round end command is set (step S237). The round end command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 502. Thereby, the effect of the small hit gaming state corresponding to the round instructed by the round end command is executed by the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the speakers 18, 57, and the like. Note that one round end command for small hits is prepared as a small hit round end command (small hit round end command).

  Next, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 controls the round waiting time corresponding to the small hit (from the time when the special winning opening 272 is closed by the attacker device 270 until the special winning opening 272 is opened again. Is set in the interval timer (step S238), and when the special symbol process flag is updated (step S231) so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned special winning opening opening post-processing (step S57). finish. The interval timer is set with a round waiting time corresponding to the same big number of rounds to be executed and a common round waiting time, for example, depending on 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit and small hit. The common round waiting time is set in the interval timer.

  If it is determined in step S225 that the release timer is not 0, that is, the release time set in the release timer has not elapsed, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when a timer interrupt occurs next time, the special winning opening releasing process is executed again.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the release time set in the release timer has elapsed, and the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 272 is a predetermined number ( In this example, when one of the numbers reaches 10), the currently executed round is terminated. In other words, when the opening time set in the opening timer has elapsed and when the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 272 has reached a predetermined number (10 in this example), the round end condition is satisfied. It is determined that the round being executed is completed. In the small hit game state and the 2R big hit game state, it is determined that the condition for ending the round is satisfied when the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 272 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example). Instead, it may be determined that the round end condition is satisfied only when the release time set in the release timer has elapsed, and the currently executed round may be ended.

[Regarding post-processing after opening the grand prize award]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the post-opening processing for the special winning opening (step S57).

  When the special symbol process flag indicates that the processing after the special winning opening is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 63, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S251. 1 is subtracted from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the special winning opening 272 is opened by the attacker device 270, and the interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed. A determination is made (step S252). If the interval timer is not 0, it is determined that the standby time set in the interval timer has not elapsed, and the processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing.

  The main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 determines that the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed (step S252), and based on the value of the release counter being 0 (step S253), the big hit gaming state When ending (step S254), after executing the time reduction setting process for setting whether to execute the control of the time reduction state (step S255), the big hit flag is turned off (step S256). Next, when the control in the high probability state is executed after the big hit gaming state is finished, that is, when the 15R probability variable big hit, the 2R probability variable big hit A, and the 2R probability variable big hit B are finished (step S257), the probability changing flag is turned on. (Step S258) When the control in the high probability state is not executed after the big hit gaming state is finished, that is, when the 2R non-probable big hit is finished (Step S257), the probability change flag is turned off (Step S259). Then, the process proceeds to step S261.

  Further, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 determines that the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed (step S252), and based on the value of the release counter being 0 (step S253), When the winning game state is ended (step S254), the small hit flag is turned off (step S260), and the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the special symbol normal processing (step S50). (Step S261), the process is terminated.

  Further, if the big hit gaming state is executed when the release counter is not 0 in step S253 (step S262), the type of big hit (15R probability variable big hit, 2R positive variable big hit A, 2R positive variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) A round start command corresponding to the round to be executed is set (step S263). Then, an opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the opening timer (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S267.

  Further, if the small hit gaming state is executed when the release counter is not 0 in step S253 (step S262), a round start command corresponding to the round to be executed (2 rounds in the case of step S265) is set ( Step S265). Then, the small opening time is set in the release timer (step S266), the release counter is decremented by 1 (step S267), and the attacker device 270 is driven to control the special winning opening 272 to be in the open state (step S268). . Then, when the above-described special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned special winning opening opening process (step S56) (step S269), this process is terminated.

  In step S269, the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process for opening the big prize opening, so that the next process for opening the big prize opening is executed when a timer interruption occurs next time. In the special winning opening opening process, the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the special winning opening opening post-processing based on the fact that the round end condition is satisfied. In other words, in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, after executing the first round (one round) by executing the big winning opening opening process based on the contents set in the big winning opening opening pre-processing, By repeatedly executing the post-opening process and the big prize opening opening process, the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state round are executed.

[About short-time setting processing]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the time reduction setting process (step S255).

  In the time reduction setting process, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 determines whether or not to end the 2R big hit gaming state (step S291). As described above, in this embodiment, the control of the short time state is always executed after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state. However, the control of the short time state and the control of the short time state are executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state. May not be executed. Specifically, if the short-time end condition is not satisfied when ending the 2R big hit gaming state, that is, if the short time flag is set when ending the 2R big hit gaming state (step S292), the 2R probability change It is determined whether or not the big hit A has been executed (step S293). When the 2R probability variation big hit A is not executed, that is, when one of the 2R probability variation big hit B and the 2R non-probable big hit is executed, the time reduction counter is set to “100 times” (step S294), and the time reduction state After turning on the time reduction flag indicating that the control is executed and turning on the restriction time reduction flag indicating that there is a restriction on the period for executing the time reduction control (step S295), the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S293 that the 2R probability variation big hit A has been executed and if it is determined in step S291 that the 15R big change big hit has been executed, the time reduction flag is turned on and the limited time reduction flag is turned off. (Step S296), the process ends. If it is determined in step S292 that the time reduction flag is not turned on, that is, if the time reduction flag and the limited time reduction flag are not turned on because the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the processing ends.

  When both the limited time flag and the time flag are on, the special symbol display 302 performs the special symbol change display 100 times or the special symbol display 302 displays the special symbol change. Before the display is executed 100 times, the time-short state control is executed until the big hit is reached. On the other hand, when only the time reduction flag is on and the time limit reduction flag is off, the time reduction control is executed until a big hit is reached. That is, when only the time reduction flag is turned on, the control of the time reduction state is executed in a state that is more advantageous than when both the limited time reduction flag and the time reduction flag are turned on.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the 15R big hit (15R probability variable big hit) is reached, the control in the short-time state is executed until the next big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) after the big hit gaming state ends. The Also, if 2R big hit (2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit), the big hit game is based on the condition that the time-short end condition is not satisfied when the big hit gaming state is terminated. After completion of the state, the time-short state control is executed, and if the 2R probability variation big hit A, the time-short state control is executed until the next big hit, and if the 2R probability variation big hit B and 2R non-probable big hit, the special symbol display 302 Control of the short-time state until the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times at or until the big symbol (2R big hit, 15R big hit) is reached before the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times by the special symbol display 302. Is executed.

  In addition, if the time-end condition is satisfied when the big hit gaming state is terminated when the 2R big hit (2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) is reached, the time will be shortened after the big hit gaming state ends. Do not perform state control. As described above, the same control is executed in the small hit gaming state and the 2R big hit gaming state, and it is difficult to determine whether the small hit gaming state or the 2R big hit gaming state is executed. . Also, after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state, it is controlled to a high probability state, but after the small hit gaming state is ended, the previous gaming state is continued. If the control is not executed (if it is a normal state), the control is performed to the normal state without executing the control of the short time state and the high probability state, and the control of the short time state is executed as the previous gaming state and the high probability state When the control is not executed, the control of the short-time state is executed (if the low-probability time-short state is not executed), and the low-probability time-short state is not executed.

  Here, if the control of the short time state is always executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state, if the control of the short time state is not executed, it is grasped that the small hit gaming state has been executed, There is a risk that interest will be reduced by diminishing expectations. Therefore, when the 2R jackpot gaming state is ended, the previous gaming state is determined, and if the time-saving end condition is not satisfied, the control of the time-saving state is executed after the 2R jackpot gaming state is ended, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the small hit game state is executed or the 2R big hit game state is executed by performing control so that the control of the short time state is not executed after the end of the 2R big hit game state. It is possible to prevent the expectation for the probability state from being lowered and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[Regarding normal symbol process]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, assuming that the above-described special symbol process is executed (step S14), as shown in FIG. 65, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first has a detection signal from the gate sensor 206 turned on ( On the condition that there is a passage at the gate 204 (step S300), for example, a starting gate passage process such as obtaining a random number for normal symbol determination from the random number counter and storing it in the RAM of the main control MPU 504, etc. Is executed (step S310). After that, one of the following four process processes is selectively executed according to the above-described normal symbol process flag.

  1. Normal symbol waiting process (step S320) in which a lottery process for winning the winning is performed based on a random number for normal symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 504

  2. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 322 is stopped (step S330).

  3. A normal symbol stop process for stopping the normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery processing related to the winning is displayed on the normal symbol display 322 (step S340).

  4). Movable piece drive process in which the drive control of the movable piece 222 is performed (step S350).

  Next, specific aspects of the start gate passage process (step S310) and the four process processes (steps S320 to S350) will be described in detail separately for those processes.

[Starting gate passage processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the start gate passage process (step S310).

  Now, in the process of step S300, if it is determined that the gate sensor 206 is on and the game ball has passed the gate 204, as shown in FIG. In step S311, the control MPU 504 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 504. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-described number of normal symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S311, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S312 to S314 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S312, the normal holding number counter is counted up. Next, as the processing in step S313, the normal symbol per-determination random number is acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S314, the normal symbol per-determining random number thus obtained is stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 504. At this point, this process ends.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S311 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. In other words, this processing is terminated when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value without performing the processing of steps S312 to S314.

[Regarding normal symbol standby processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol waiting process (step S320).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol standby process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 67, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S401. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the holding state based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, as a process of next step S402, the normal symbol per unit stored in the random number storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 504 The random number stored first among the random numbers for determination is read from the RAM of the main control MPU 504. Next, as the processing in steps S403 and S404, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and the determination random number per normal symbol stored in the random number storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 504 is first-in first-out (First-In The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode. As a result, the suspension of the normal symbol variation display control is released.

  After that, as a process of step S405, a lottery process for the winning combination is performed based on the read random number for normal symbol determination. In the lottery process, the read random number for normal symbol determination is compared with the hit determination value (not shown) stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 504. As a result of the comparison, when the read random number for normal symbol determination matches the winning determination value indicating that the winning is won (step S406), the winning indicating that the winning state is present is obtained. A flag is set (step S407).

  When the operation of the hit flag is performed in this manner, the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time required for variation display control of the normal symbol, opening time of the movable piece 222, etc.) is then processed as steps S408 to S410. Is determined according to the information indicated by the above-mentioned time reduction flag.

  For example, when the time reduction flag indicates that the control of the time reduction state is not executed (time reduction flag is off) (step S408), a predetermined normal time variation pattern is set (step S410). ). In this normal time variation pattern, for example, “21700” ms is set as the variation time required for variation display control of the normal symbol, “500” ms is set as the opening time of the movable piece 222, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the time reduction flag indicates that the control of the time reduction state is being executed (the time reduction flag is on) (step S408), a predetermined fluctuation pattern for time reduction is set (step S409). ). For example, “4512” ms is set as the change time required for the change display control of the normal symbol, “1700” ms is set as the open time of the movable piece 222, and the like. Thus, a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is more advantageous when the time-short state control is being executed than when the time-short state control is not being executed.

  Then, when the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined in this way, the variation display control of the normal symbol is executed according to the determined variation pattern as a process of step S411. Next, as the process of step S412, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation process (step S330), this process ends.

[Regarding normal symbol variation processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S330).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol change process should be performed, as shown in FIG. After the lottery process (step S320) for the variation pattern is performed, the process waits until the variation time lottered by the process elapses. If it is determined in the process of step S421 that the lottered variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S422. That is, in the process of step S422, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol stop process (step S340), this process ends.

[Regarding normal symbol stop processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop process (step S340).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 69, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S431. Display control is performed to display a symbol corresponding to the state of the hit flag on the normal symbol display 322 (see FIG. 9).

  After that, when the hit flag is set (step S432), when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the movable piece driving process (step S350) (step S433), This process ends. On the other hand, when the hit flag is not set (step S432), when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol waiting process (step S320) (step S434), End the process.

[About movable piece drive processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable piece driving process (step S350).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the movable piece driving process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 70, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first performs the process of step S441. It is determined whether the start-up solenoid 220 is in an on state. When the start port solenoid 220 is off, the start port solenoid 220 is turned on to drive the movable piece 222 (step S445).

  On the other hand, if the start port solenoid 220 is in the ON state in the process of step S441, the process waits until the drive end condition for the movable piece 222 is satisfied as the process of step S442. The drive end condition is, for example, that a predetermined number of game balls enter the second start port 214 and that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start port solenoid 220 is turned on. Any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, when such a drive end condition is satisfied, the start-up solenoid 220 is turned off as the processing of step S443. After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol waiting process (step S320) (step S444), this processing is ended.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 92 that receives various commands from the main control board 94 will be described. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the reset process, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub timer interrupt process, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 74 is the command reception end. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an interruption process.

[About reset processing]
First, when the reset process is started, as shown in FIG. 71, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 performs an initial setting process (step S2100). This initial setting process includes a process for initializing the sub-integrated MPU 520 and a process for setting a wait timer after reset. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process.

  Following step S2100, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG has a value of 0 (step S2102). This 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG is a flag for measuring 16 ms in timer interrupt processing processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG is 1 in step S2102, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG (step S2104), and the value 1 is set in the 16 ms processing flag P-FLG. Set (step S2106). The 16 ms processing flag P-FLG is set to a value of 1 when starting 16 ms steady processing, which will be described later, and a value of 0 when ending.

  Subsequent to step S2106, 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S2108). This 16 ms steady process includes a command analysis process for analyzing various commands from the transmission information transmitted from the main control board 94, and lighting control for the decoration lamp 530 shown in FIG. 41 (for example, stored in the built-in RAM of the main control MPU 504). In order to notify that all the contents are erased (cleared), the decoration lamp 530 is controlled to be turned on for 30 seconds.) The lamp process for controlling the gradation of the light emitting means 314 and the 16 ms steady process are performed. In addition to the watchdog timer process for monitoring whether or not, for example, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the scheduler activation of the 16 ms sorting motor for setting the driving pattern of the sorting motor 350 shown in FIG. Perform processing.

  Subsequent to step S2108, the 16 ms processing flag P-FLG is set to a value of 0 (end of 16 ms steady processing) (step S2110), and the process returns to step S2102 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG becomes 1 That is, step S2104 to step S2110 are repeated every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG is not 1 in step S2102 (when the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG is 0), that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, until the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG becomes 1, ie, Wait until 16 ms elapses.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
Next, when the sub timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 72, the sub integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 performs 2 ms timer interrupt processing (step S2120). The 2 ms timer interruption process is, for example, a history creation process for creating a detection history (sampling history) from the detection signal from the rotational position detection sensor 384 shown in FIG. Then, the sorting motor driving process for driving the sorting motor 350 shown in FIG. 41 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S2120, the value 1 is added to the 2 ms update counter C (step S2122). The 2 ms update counter C is a counter that counts the number of times that the sub-side timer interrupt processing has been performed, and a value 1 of the 2 ms update counter C corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Following step S2122, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter C has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter C × 2 ms) (step S2124). If 16 ms, the 16 ms elapsed flag T-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S2126), and the 16 ms processing flag P-FLG is 0, that is, the 16 ms steady process of step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. 71 is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S2128). When the 16 ms processing flag P-FLG is 0, that is, when the 16 ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S2130), and this routine is terminated. In this work area backup, the information processed in the 16 ms steady process of step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. 71 is copied to a copy area provided in the work area.

  On the other hand, if 16 ms has not elapsed in step S2124 or if no information is set during the 16 ms steady process in step S2128, this routine is terminated as it is.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, when the command reception interrupt process is started, as shown in FIG. 73, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 starts receiving a command from the main control board 94 (hereinafter referred to as “WR signal”). And a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 94 (hereinafter referred to as “SEL signal”) are determined to be 1 (step S2140). The main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 first sets a SEL signal corresponding to the peripheral control board 92 to a value 1 and a WR signal to a value 1 and transmits a command to the peripheral control board 92.

  This command is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. This “nibble” means 4 bits, which is 8 bits (1 byte) in 2 nibbles, that is, 16 bits (2 bytes) in 4 nibbles. In the extraction of 1 nibble data, the WR signal rises from the value 0 to the value 1 (referred to as “up edge”) and is held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 μs to 50 μs). And is performed four times in total for one packet.

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S2140, that is, when the main control MPU 504 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 92, command reception processing is performed (step S2142), and this routine is terminated. In this command reception process, the received 1 nibble command (one of four divided commands) is stored in a ring buffer of a RAM built in the sub-integrated MPU 520. This “ring buffer” is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer is connected to the beginning, and stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. After storing in the ring buffer, the buffer write counter is incremented by “1”. This buffer write counter increments by one each time a command reception process is performed. Therefore, when 1 packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter has a value of 4.

  On the other hand, when both the SEL signal and the WR signal are 0 in step S2140, that is, when the main control MPU 504 does not output a command to the peripheral control board 92, this routine is ended as it is. Note that, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 94 to the peripheral control board 92, as described above, a predetermined time (for example, 20 μs to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Bit) is held constant, but the signal may be disturbed due to noise and the command may not be received normally. Therefore, as a countermeasure against the noise, the sub-integrated MPU 520 receives the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits) (first time), and after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs), the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Bit). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time. If the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time coincide with each other, it is determined whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S2140. On the other hand, when it does not match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and received at the first time. The determination is repeated until it matches the selected SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits).

[Command reception end interrupt processing]
Next, when the command reception end interrupt process is started, as shown in FIG. 74, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 (step). S2150). When the transmission of the command to the peripheral control board 92 is completed, the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 sets the WR signal to the value 0 and then sets the SEL signal to the value 0 (down edge). When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 in step S2150, that is, when the main control MPU 504 completes command transmission to the peripheral control board 92, command reception end processing is performed (step S2152), and this routine is ended. . In this command reception end process, a value of 0 is set in the buffer write counter added in the command reception interrupt process described above. When the command is successfully received, the buffer write counter has a value of 4 because one packet is 4 nibbles. Further, when reception of one packet cannot be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than 4, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, when both the WR signal and the SEL signal are not 0 in step S2150, that is, when the main control MPU 504 has not completed transmission of a command to the peripheral control board 92, this routine is ended as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, when the sub-integrated MPU 520 receives the SEL signal (first time), the sub-integrated MPU 520 receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time (for example, 1 μs), and receives the SEL signal received the first time. It is determined whether or not they match. If it matches the SEL signal received for the first time, it is determined in step S2150 whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are zero. On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the SEL signal received for the first time, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time, and the determination is repeated until it coincides with the SEL signal received for the first time.

  In this embodiment, the priority order of each process is set in the order of command reception interrupt processing, command reception end interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, and 16 ms steady processing.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 performs various processes by performing the sub-side timer interrupt process every 16 ms. The various processes to be described in detail use sequential flowcharts in order to easily explain the specifications of the pachinko machine 1.

[About production control processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process, the sub-integrated MPU 520 selectively executes one of the following four process processes according to the effect control process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the built-in RAM. Become.

  1. Control the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the LEDs of the light emitting means 314, the speakers 18, 57, and the like based on the effect command (variation pattern command) that instructs the change pattern of the special symbol analyzed in the command analysis process. Variation production start processing (step S700)

  2. The elapsed time since the start of the control of the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, each LED of the light emitting means 314, the speakers 18, 57, etc. is measured, and the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the light emission is measured according to the elapsed time. Fluctuating effect processing in which processing for controlling each LED of the means 314, the speakers 18, 57, etc. is performed (step S701).

  3. Fluctuation effect end process (step for performing a process of deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on receiving the big hit start command and the small hit start command and updating the effect control process flag so that the round effect process is started) S702).

  4). Round effect processing that executes effects in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, and updates the effect control process flag so that the variable effect start process is started when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished. (Step S703).

  The effect control process flag is operated to indicate that the variation effect start process (step S700) should be performed in the process of step S501 (see FIG. 71).

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub-integrated MPU 520 receives the jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command) corresponding to the 15R jackpot (15R probable big jackpot) in the above-described fluctuating effects end process, The decorative lamp 530, the LEDs of the light emitting means 314, the speakers 18, 57, etc. are controlled to notify that the 15R probability variation big hit is started. On the other hand, a big hit start command (2R big hit start command) according to 2R big hit (2R positive change big hit A, 2R positive change big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) and a small hit start command according to the small hit are received in the above-mentioned variation effect end processing. In such a case, the sub-integrated MPU 520 controls the effect display device 202, the decoration lamp 530, the LEDs of the light emitting means 314, the speakers 18, 57, etc. without notifying whether the 2R big hit or the small hit is made. A predetermined effect is executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is a 2R big hit or a small hit.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect start process (step S700).

  When the effect control process flag indicates that the change effect start process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 76, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 first changes as the process of step S901. It is determined whether a pattern command is received. If the variation pattern command has been received, normal mode effect setting processing is executed (step S902). In this embodiment, the sub-integrated MPU 520 is one of a plurality of modes in which the image displayed on the effect display device 202, the driving mode of the decorative lamp 530 and the various light emitting means 314, and the sound output mode of the speakers 18 and 57 are different. To control. In the normal mode effect setting process, the number of executions of the mode is counted, and when the number of executions has reached the number of continuations of the mode (the number of variable displays executed in the mode), the mode to be controlled next and the Determine how many times the mode will continue. Note that when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, specifically, when the initial setting process (step S501) is executed, the pachinko machine 1 is set to a predetermined mode (for example, mode 1) among the plurality of modes. It is like that.

  Next, the sub-integrated MPU 520 determines whether or not the 15R probability variation big hit is obtained as a result of the variation display based on the received variation pattern command (step S903). If the 15R probability variation big hit is obtained as a result of the variable display, the 15R probability variation symbol as a stop symbol is determined (step S904). As described above, in this embodiment, the 15R probability variable symbol that is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 202 is determined to be one of the same symbol combinations. Then, the sub integrated MPU 520 sets a round effect flag (step S905), and proceeds to step S906. The round effect flag is a flag indicating that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is controlled after the end of the variable display.

  Further, when the fluctuation display based on the received fluctuation pattern command does not result in 15R very big hit (step S903), 2R big hit (2R positive variable big hit A, 2R positive variable big hit B, 2R non-probable big big hit) or small hit In step S910, 2R big hit symbols and small hit symbols as stop symbols are determined (step S911). As described above, in this embodiment, a combination of symbols including “1”, “2”, and “3” as 2R big hit symbols and small hit symbols that are stopped and displayed on the effect display device 202 is determined. To do. Then, the sub-integrated MPU 520 executes a game ball distribution determination process (step S912), and proceeds to step S905.

  In this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the big winning opening 272 during the execution of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are the first distribution port 336 and the second distribution port 338 that are distributed by the distribution device 330. And the third distribution port 340, and are discharged from the first discharge unit 396, the second discharge unit 402, and the third discharge unit 408, and roll on the effect unit 318. Then, based on the fact that the game ball rolling on the effect unit 318 is received in the first receiving port 410, the mode is changed to a mode different from the normal mode (special mode 2) after the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state are finished. Control. Note that the game balls distributed to the first distribution port 336 by the distribution device 330 are discharged from the first discharge unit 396, and the game balls distributed to the second distribution port 338 are discharged from the second discharge unit 402. The game balls distributed to the third distribution port 340 are discharged from the third discharge portion 408. Further, as described above, when the game ball is released from the second discharge portion 402, it is most easily received by the first receiving port 410, and when the game ball is discharged from the third discharge portion 408, the first receiving port 410 is received. The most unacceptable. In the distribution determination process, a process for determining which of the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340 is to be performed by the distribution device 330 is performed.

  Also, stop if the result of fluctuation display based on the received fluctuation pattern command is not 15R big hit (15R positive variation big hit), 2R big hit (2R positive variation big hit A, 2R positive variation big hit B, 2R non-probable big hit) or small hit An outlier symbol as a symbol is determined (step S913). As described above, in this embodiment, at least two kinds of combinations of symbols are determined as the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the effect display device 202. Then, the process proceeds to step S906.

  Thereafter, the sub-integrated MPU 520 sets the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command in the effect timer (step S906), and the control mode (effect display device 202, decoration lamp 530, various light emitting means 314) corresponding to the above mode. Process data corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected from a plurality of types of process data for which the control modes of the speakers 18 and 57 are set (step S907). Then, display control of the effect display device 202 is started based on the selected process data (step S908).

  The process data is stored in the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 in association with the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 and the above mode. The sub-integrated MPU 520 selects process data associated with the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 from among a plurality of types of process data corresponding to the controlled mode, and selects the selected process data. The display control of the effect display device 202 is executed based on the above.

  Then, the sub-integrated MPU 520 ends this process when the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the fluctuating effect processing (step S701) (step S909). If the variation pattern command has not been received in step S901, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

[Regarding normal mode effect setting processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal mode effect setting process (step S902).

  In the normal mode effect setting process, first, whether or not the special mode 1 flag indicating that the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 is controlling to the special mode 1 different from the normal mode is turned on. Is discriminated (step S1001). If the special mode 1 flag is on, the process is terminated without performing the subsequent processes. The special mode 1 is a mode that is executed when the high-probability time-short state and the time-short state control are not limited 100 times, and are 2R probability variation big hit B and 2R non-probability big hit. Based on this, the special mode 1 is terminated, and the special mode 2 is controlled after the 2R big hit gaming state. That is, the special mode 1 is a mode that shows a very advantageous state for the player.

  Also, if the special mode 1 flag is not turned on and the special mode 2 flag is turned on (step S1002), the mode number counter is decremented by 1 (step S1003), and the mode number counter becomes 0 (step S1003). S1004), the special mode 2 flag is turned off (step S1005), and the process proceeds to step S1008. If the mode number counter is not 0 in step S1004, the control is continued to mode 2 by ending the process without performing the subsequent processes. In the special mode 2, when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 272 is received in the first receiving port 410 during the execution of the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state, the special mode 1 is executed. It is a mode that is executed when 2R probability change big hit B and 2R non-probable big hit are in the middle, and may be in a state advantageous to the player (in this example, control in a high probability state may be executed) ) Is a high mode. In this example, the special mode 2 is terminated when the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is executed, and the normal mode is controlled.

  If the special mode 1 flag and the special mode 2 flag are not on (steps S1001 and S1002), the mode number counter is decremented by 1 (step S1006), and the mode number counter is not 0 (step S1007). The current mode is continuously controlled by terminating the process without performing the subsequent processes. On the other hand, when the mode number counter reaches 0 in step S1007, processing for setting the mode is performed.

  In this example, the normal mode (a mode other than the special mode 1 and the special mode 2) is controlled to any one of the four modes of the mode 1, the mode 2, the mode 3, and the special mode. FIG. 78 shows a normal mode determination table. FIG. 78A is a high-probability normal mode determination table used during execution of high-probability state control, and FIG. 78B is a low-level table used when high-probability state control is not being executed. It is a normal mode decision table at the time of probability.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in this example, the change-destination mode (the mode to be controlled next) is determined at a different rate depending on the current mode. In addition, the number of executions is set in the change-destination mode, and the number of executions in the mode is determined at the same time by determining the change-destination mode. In the high-probability normal mode determination table shown in FIG. 78 (A), the ratio for determining the special mode as the change-destination mode is set high regardless of the current mode, whereas FIG. 78 (B). The low probability normal mode determination table is set so that the ratio of determining the special mode is lower than that of the high probability normal mode determination table. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is not notified to the player whether or not the high probability state is controlled, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the high probability state is controlled. When the control in the high probability state is being executed, it is easy to determine the special mode. Therefore, expectation for the high probability state can be achieved when the special mode is controlled.

  When the normal mode effect setting process has passed through step S1007, the table of mode 1, mode 2, mode 3, or special mode is selected as the current mode, and the process has passed through step S1005. The special mode 2 table is selected.

  As a process for setting the mode, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines whether or not the high-probability state is controlled (step S1008). The normal mode determination table is selected (step S1009). If the high probability state is not controlled, the low probability normal mode determination table is selected (step S1010). Then, a mode determination random number is acquired (step S1011), and the change-destination mode and the number of executions are determined based on the selected normal mode determination table and the acquired mode determination random number (step S1012).

  In this embodiment, the number of executions is set in the change-destination mode, and the number of executions in the mode is determined by determining the change-destination mode. The number of executions in the mode may be determined as one of a plurality of executions. By comprising in this way, the variation of a game can be increased and a game interest can be improved.

  When the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines the change destination mode and the number of executions in the mode, the sub-integration MPU 520 sets the number of executions in the mode number counter (step S1013) and switches to the determined mode for control (step S1013). Step S1014).

[About game ball distribution determination processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game ball distribution determination process (step S912).

  In the game ball distribution determination process, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 first executes the subsequent process unless any of mode 1, mode 2 and mode 3 is executed as the process of step S1201. The process is finished without. That is, in this example, when the 2R big hit and the small hit are made, the special mode 1, the special mode 2 and the special mode are controlled, and the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are executed during the execution of the 2R big hit gaming state. The game ball that enters the ball 272 is not released from any one of the first discharge unit 396, the second discharge unit 402, and the third discharge unit 408.

  Further, when any one of mode 1, mode 2 and mode 3 is executed (step S1201), if 2R probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B) (step S1202, step S1203), A high probability allocation table is selected (step S1204), and the process proceeds to step S1205. On the other hand, if it is 2R non-probable big hit (steps S1202 and S1203), the low probability time distribution table is selected (step S1210), and the process proceeds to step S1205. That is, when high probability state control is executed after the end of the 2R jackpot gaming state, a high probability time allocation table is selected, and when high probability state control is not executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state, low probability is selected. Select the time distribution table.

  If it is not 2R big hit, that is, if it is a small hit (step S1202), it is determined whether or not the control is in a high probability state (step S1209). The minute table is selected (step S1204), and the process proceeds to step S1205. On the other hand, if the high probability state is not controlled (step S1209), the low probability distribution table is selected (step S1210), and the process proceeds to step S1205. In other words, when high probability state control is executed after the small hit gaming state is finished, a high probability time allocation table is selected, and when high probability state control is not executed after the small hit gaming state is finished, low probability is selected. Select the time distribution table.

  When the distribution table is selected, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 acquires a random number for distribution determination (step S1205), and distributes based on the selected distribution table and the acquired random number for distribution determination. The mouth (one of the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340) is determined (step S1206), while the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are being executed, On the condition that the count detection command output from the main control board 94 is received based on the detection of the count sensor 278 that detects the entrance of the game ball to the winning opening 272, the first discharge unit 396, the second discharge unit In step S1207, the distribution execution flag indicating that an effect to be emitted from any one of 402 and the third emission unit 408 is performed is turned on, and driving of the distribution device 330 is started. Setting the allocation start timer indicating a period in (step S1208). Thereby, when the distribution start timer times out (the value of the distribution start timer becomes 0), the distribution device 330 is driven.

  Here, the distribution table will be described. FIG. 80 (A) is a high-probability time allocation table used when high probability state control is executed after the end of the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state, and FIG. 80 (B) shows the 2R big hit game state. It is a low probability time distribution table used when control of a high probability state is not executed after the state and the small hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the high probability time distribution table, the ratio determined to the second distribution port 338 is set to be higher than the low probability time distribution table, and the low probability time distribution table is set. The ratio determined for the third distribution port 340 is set to be lower than that of the table. As described above, the game balls distributed to the second distribution port 338 are discharged from the second discharge portion 402, and the game balls are discharged to the first receiving port 410 most when the game balls are discharged from the second discharge portion 402. The game balls distributed to the third distribution port 340 are easily received, and the third discharge portion 408 is discharged. When the game balls are discharged from the third discharge portion 408, the game balls are hardly received in the first receiving port 410. That is, when the control of the high probability state is executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the game ball is determined as the distribution port (second distribution port 338) that can be easily received in the first reception port 410. When the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are not executed and the control in the high probability state is not executed, the game ball is difficult to be received in the first receiving port 410 (the third distributing port). The distribution table is configured so that the ratio determined in 340) is high. With this configuration, when the high probability state is controlled, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 272 during the execution of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is received in the first receiving port 410. Based on this, the ratio of being controlled to the special mode 2 is increased after the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished, and when the special mode 2 is controlled, the high probability state can be expected. , Can improve the game entertainment.

[About processing during fluctuating production]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the above-described process during variation effect (step S701).

  When the effect control process flag indicates that the process during the variation effect should be performed, as shown in FIG. 81, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 first performs the process of step S921 The effect timer in which the variation time indicated by the variation pattern received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 is set is decremented by 1. If the effect timer is not 0, that is, if it is determined that the variation time instructed from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 has not elapsed (step S922), the process proceeds to step S923. That is, in the process of step S923, the decorative display variable display is executed by continuously executing the display control of the effect display device 202 based on the process data.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect timer is 0, that is, the variation time instructed from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 has elapsed (step S922), the process proceeds to step S924. That is, in the process of step S924, this process ends when the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variation effect end process (step S702).

[Variation production end processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the fluctuating effect end processing (step S702).

  When the effect control process flag indicates that the variation effect end process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 82, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 first performs the process of step S931. If a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, the stop symbol determined in step S904, step S911, and step S913 of the variable effect start process is derived and displayed on the effect display device 202 (step S932). .

  Next, when the round effect flag is set (step S933), the sub integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines whether or not a 15R big hit start command has been received (step S934). If the 15R big hit start command has been received (step S934), the 15R big hit flag is set (step S935), and the effect display device 202 displays that the 15R big hit starts (step S936). Thereafter, the round effect flag is turned off (step S937), and when the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the round effect process (step S703), this process ends (step S938).

  If the 15R jackpot start command has not been received (step S934), if the 2R jackpot start command has been received (step S940), the 2R jackpot flag is set (step S941), and the process proceeds to step S936. The effect display device 202 performs a predetermined effect display. Further, when the 15R big hit start command and the 2R big hit start command are not received (steps S934 and S940), if the small hit start command is received (step S942), the small hit flag is set (step S942). In step S943, the process proceeds to step S936, and a predetermined effect display is performed on the effect display device 202. In this embodiment, when the 2R big hit is started and when the small hit is started, the effect display executed by the effect display device 202 is the same. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the 2R big hit or the small hit starts from the effect display mode executed by the effect display device 202.

  If the 15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command, and small hit start command have not been received (step S934, step S940, step S942), the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

  If the round effect flag is not set in step S933, the process ends when the effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variable effect start process (step S700) (step S939). ). If a stop display command has not been received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 in step S931, the process ends without executing the shift process. As described above, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 performs display control of the effect display device 202 based on the command (effect command) received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The stop symbol of the decoration symbol is derived and displayed.

[About round effect processing]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the round effect process (step S703).

  When the process flag indicates that the round effect process should be performed, the sub integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 receives a round start command from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 as shown in FIG. If (15R big hit round start command, 2R big hit round start command, small hit round start command) are received (step S971), the type of round and jackpot indicated by the received round start command (2R big hit, 15R big hit) ) At the start of the round according to) or the effect at the start of the round according to the round and the small hit indicated by the round start command (step S972).

  If a round end command (15R big hit round end command, 2R big hit round end command, small hit end command) is received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 (step S973), the sub control of the peripheral control board 92 The integrated MPU 520 performs the production at the start of the round according to the round and jackpot type (2R jackpot, 15R jackpot) indicated by the received round end command or the round end according to the round and jackpot indicated by the round start command. The time effect is executed (step S974).

  In addition, if the distribution execution flag is on (step S975), the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 subtracts 1 from the distribution start timer (step S976), and when the distribution start timer becomes 0. (Step S977), the distribution motor 350 is driven and distributed on condition that the intrusion detection sensor 382 detects the entry of a game ball (whether or not the game ball is stored) (Step S978). The game balls are distributed to the distribution ports determined in the distribution determination process (step S912) by the device 330 (step S979). When the distribution motor 350 is driven, the distribution execution flag is turned off and the distribution completion flag is turned on on the condition that the second acceptance detection sensor 444 detects the discharge of the game ball (step S980).

  In this example, the distribution motor 350 is driven on the condition that the count detection command is received when the distribution start timer reaches 0 in step S977, and the game balls are distributed by the distribution device 330. If the count detection command is not received when the distribution start timer reaches 0, the distribution motor 350 is not driven. In other words, the distribution motor 350 is not driven unless a game ball enters the big prize opening 272 when the distribution start timer reaches zero. As described above, a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 356. Therefore, if the distribution motor 350 is driven when the distribution start timer reaches 0 in step S977, the game balls are distributed even though the game balls are not inserted into the big prize opening 272. A predetermined effect is executed by the effect unit 318. Although the game ball does not enter the big prize opening 272, the distribution motor 350 is driven, so that a predetermined effect is frequently executed in the effect unit 318, and the freshness with respect to the effect is achieved. May be lost and interest may be reduced. In this example, since the sorting motor 350 is driven on condition that a game ball has entered the grand prize winning opening 272, an impression as a special effect can be given to the effect executed by the effect unit 318. When the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state are entered, it is possible to actively play the game aiming to enter the big prize opening 272 and to improve the interest when the production is executed. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the distribution flag indicates that the game balls that have entered the big winning opening 272 during the execution of the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state are the first release unit 396, the second release unit 402, and the third release type. It is a flag indicating that an effect of discharging from any of the discharge units 408 is performed. If the distribution execution flag is not set in step S975, the process proceeds to step S981. Further, as described above, the sorting start timer indicates a period until the sorting device 330 starts to be driven. If the sorting start timer has not timed out in step S977, the sorting motor 350 is not driven. The process proceeds to step S981.

  Also, a big hit end command (15R probability change big hit end command, 2R probability change big hit A end command, 2R probability change big hit B end command, 2R non-probability big hit end command) or a small hit end command is received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94. If so (step S981), the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 executes an end-time mode effect setting process (step S982). In the end mode effect setting process, a process for determining a mode to be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is performed.

  Thereafter, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 executes an effect at the end of jackpot according to the type of jackpot or an effect at the end of jackpot according to the jackpot (step S983), and a variable effect start process (step S983). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to S700), this process ends (step S984). In the effect at the end of the big hit and the effect at the end of the small hit, for example, an effect that notifies the start of the controlled mode is executed.

[End mode production setting process]
84 to 86 are flowcharts showing the procedure for the above-described end mode effect setting process (step S982).

  In the end mode effect setting process, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 first determines the special mode 1 (step S1302) if the 15R big hit flag is set as the process of step S1301. The special mode 1 flag indicating that the mode 1 is controlled is turned on, and the special mode 2 flag indicating that the mode is controlled in the special mode 2 is turned off (step S1303). Then, after the 15R big hit flag is turned off (step S1304), the process is terminated.

  If the 15R big hit flag is not set (step S1301), the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 272 during the execution of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are the first release unit 396, the second release. It is determined whether or not the distribution flag indicating that the effect to be released from any of the unit 402 and the third emission unit 408 has been executed is on (step S1305), and the distribution flag is on. The distributed flag is turned off (step S1306). Then, it is determined whether or not the first acceptance detection sensor 442 is turned on (step S1307). If the first acceptance detection sensor 442 is turned on (step S1307), the special mode 2 is determined (step S1308), and the special reception sensor 442 is turned on. A special mode 2 flag indicating that the mode 2 is controlled is turned on (step S1309). Thereafter, the number of executions (20 in this example) is set in the mode number counter (step S1310), and the 2R big hit flag and the small hit flag are turned off (step S1311).

  If the distribution flag is not turned on (step S1305), it is determined whether or not the special mode 1 flag is turned on (step S1401). When the special mode 1 flag is on (step S1401), if the 2R probability variation big hit B or 2R non-probable big hit (step S1402), the mode is determined to be the special mode 2 (step S1403), and the special mode 1 flag is turned off. At the same time, the special mode 2 flag is turned on (step S1404). Thereafter, the number of executions (100 in this example) is set in the mode number counter (step S1405), and the process proceeds to step S1311.

  If the special mode 1 flag is not turned on (step S1401), it is determined whether or not the special mode 2 flag is turned on (step S1406). When the special mode 2 flag is turned on (step S1406), if the 2R probability change big hit (step S1407), the special mode 1 is determined (step S1408), the special mode 1 flag is turned on and the special mode 2 flag is turned on. After turning off, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  If the special mode 1 flag and the special mode 2 flag are not turned on (step S1406), the process proceeds to step S1311. If the special mode 2 flag is on (step S1406) and the 2R probability variation big hit is not found (step S1407), the process proceeds to step S1311.

  If the first acceptance detection sensor 442 is not turned on (step S1307), it is determined whether or not the high probability state control is executed after the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished (step S1501). If high probability state control is to be executed, the high probability special mode determination table is selected (step S1502). If high probability state control is not to be executed, the low probability special mode determination table is selected (step S1503). ).

  Here, the special mode determination table will be described. FIG. 87 (A) is a high probability special mode determination table used when high probability state control is executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, and FIG. 87 (B) shows the 2R big hit gaming state. It is a low-probability special mode determination table used when the control in the high-probability state is not executed after the gaming state and the small hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in this example, the change-destination mode (the mode to be controlled next) is determined at a different rate depending on the current mode. In addition, the number of executions is set in the change-destination mode, and the number of executions in the mode is determined at the same time by determining the change-destination mode. In the high-probability special mode determination table shown in FIG. 87A, the ratio of determining the special mode as the change-destination mode is set high regardless of the current mode, whereas in FIG. 87B In the low-probability special mode determination table shown in FIG. 5, the special-mode determination ratio is set to be lower than that in the high-probability special mode determination table. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is not notified to the player whether or not the high probability state is controlled, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the high probability state is controlled. When the control of the high probability state is executed after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special mode is likely to be determined, so when the special mode is controlled after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state Expect high-probability states.

  In this embodiment, the number of executions is set in the mode to be controlled, and the number of executions in the mode is determined by determining the mode to be controlled. However, after the mode to be controlled is determined, The number of executions may be determined as one of a plurality of execution times. By comprising in this way, the variation of a game can be increased and a game interest can be improved.

  When the sub integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 selects the special mode determination table, the sub integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 acquires a random number for mode determination (step S1504) and acquires the selected special mode determination table. The control mode and the number of executions are determined based on the random number for the selected mode (step S1505). Then, the number of executions is set in the mode number counter (step S1506), and the process proceeds to step S1311.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 272 during the execution of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is used for the first distribution port 336, the second A game that is released from the first discharge part 396, the second discharge part 402, and the third discharge part 408 by being distributed to any one of the dividing opening 338 and the third distributing opening 340, and rolls on the effect unit 318. Based on the fact that the ball is received in the first receiving port 410, the mode is controlled to be different from the normal mode (special mode 2) after the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished. Hereinafter, the effect display executed by the effect display device 202 in the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

[Regarding effects executed by the effect display device]
88 and 89 show examples of effects executed by the effect display device 202 when the 2R big hit or the small hit is the result of the change display based on the change pattern command received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 88A, in this example, when the 2R big hit or the small hit is obtained as a result of the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, the peripheral control is performed. The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the board 92 notifies the player that an advantageous state is generated by performing display control of “Sarumaru CHANCE” on the effect display device 202. After that, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 based on the reception of the stop display command from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 determines the 2R big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in step S911 of the variable effect start processing. Is derived and displayed.

  In addition, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 receives the change pattern command that becomes the 2R big hit or the small hit from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 in step S912 of the change effect start process. The ball distribution determination process is executed, and the game balls that have entered the big winning opening 272 during the execution of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are sent to the first distribution port 336 and the second distribution by the distribution device 330. While determining which of the mouth 338 and the third sorting mouth 340 to distribute, a sorting start timer indicating a period until the driving of the sorting motor 350 is started is set.

  Next, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 receives the 2R big hit start command and the small hit start command from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, as shown in FIG. 88 (B). The display device 202 is notified that the opening / closing member 274 of the attacker device 270 is controlled to be in the open state by performing display control of “Aim Up!”. The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 starts measuring the distribution start timer based on the reception of the 2R big hit start command and the small hit start command from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, When the distribution start timer times out, it receives a count detection command output from the main control board 94 based on the detection of the count sensor 278 that detects the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening 272, and detects intrusion Based on whether or not the sensor 382 has detected the entry of a game ball (whether or not the game ball is stored) (step S978), the distribution motor 350 is driven and the distribution device 330 distributes the game balls. The game balls are distributed to the distribution ports determined by the determination process (any of the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340).

  When the count detection command is not received when the distribution start timer times out, that is, when a game ball does not enter the big winning opening 272 during execution of the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state. In this case, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 does not drive the sorting motor 350, and the predetermined effect is displayed on the effect display device 202 (in this example, the character displayed on the effect display device 202 is idle. ) Is executed (FIG. 88C).

  Even if the count detection command is received when the distribution start timer times out, even if the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 272 flows into the guide discharge passage 462, the intrusion detection sensor If the game ball is detected by the 382, that is, if the game ball is already stored, the stored game ball (2R big hit and small hit will be won before the current lottery, An effect by the sorting device 330 is executed using a plurality of game balls that have entered and stored in the winning opening 272. As described above, when the game ball does not enter the big prize opening 272 even though the game ball is given an opportunity to enter the big prize opening 272, the game ball already stored is used. Thus, the effect by the sorting device 330 is executed (that is, the effect by the sorting device 330 is not executed).

  In the present embodiment, at least two game balls can be stored in the storage passage 356, and the intrusion detection sensor 382 is arranged to detect the game balls stored in the storage passage 356. After the distribution device 330 detects that the game ball has entered the big prize opening 272 by the count sensor 278, the entered game ball is discharged through the discharge passage 358 without being stored in the storage passage 356. Even in this case, the game balls already stored in the storage passage 356 are distributed to any one of the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340. Yes. For this reason, even if the game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening 272 is not stored in the storage passage 356 for some reason, the sorting device 330 uses the game ball already stored in the storage passage 356 to Any one of the distribution ports 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340 can be distributed. Therefore, even if the player causes the game ball to enter the grand prize winning opening 272 and is not stored in the storage passage 356, the game ball effect space 308 is used from the distribution port using the game ball already stored in the distribution device 330. It can be guided to the player and does not give anxiety to the player.

  The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92, when driving the distribution motor 350, distributes by the distribution device 330 (the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340). Display control of the effect display device 202 according to any one of the above. Specifically, when the game balls are distributed to the first distribution port 336 and released from the first discharge unit 396, the effect display device 202 is controlled to display “exploded rock!” (FIG. 89 (D1)). ) When the game balls are distributed to the second distribution port 338 and released from the second release unit 402, the effect display device 202 is controlled to display “Ship! Moz Drop!” (FIG. 89 (D2)) When the game balls are distributed to the third distribution port 340 and released from the third discharge unit 408, the effect display device 202 is controlled to display “Fly! Abare Sesame!” (FIG. 89 (D3)). Thereby, the effect display device 202 can execute the effect display in synchronization with the behavior of the game ball, and the player can recognize from which discharge port the game ball is released.

  As described above, the distribution device 330 uses the first distribution port 336, the second distribution port 338, and the third distribution port 340 to distribute the game balls stored in the storage passage 356. In order to distribute the game balls to the distribution opening corresponding to the effect image displayed on the effect display device 202, the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 272 correspond to the effect image displayed on the effect display device 202. When the game ball is directed to the game ball effect space 308, the player is interested in the destination of the game ball guided to the game ball effect space 308 in addition to the effect image displayed on the effect display device 202. It becomes difficult to lose the fresh taste. Thereby, the fall of a player's game can be suppressed.

  The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 receives the 2R probability variation big hit A end command, 2R probability variation big hit B end command, 2R non-probability variable big hit end command, and the small hit end command in step S982 of the round effect process. When the end-time mode effect setting process is executed and the game balls distributed by the distribution device 330 are received in the first receiving port 410, the special mode 2 is controlled after the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished, If the game balls distributed by the distribution device 330 are not received in the first receiving port 410, control is performed in any one of the mode 1, mode 2, mode 3 and special mode after the 2R big hit game state and the small hit game state are finished. To do.

  Specifically, if a game ball is detected by the first acceptance detection sensor 442 when a 2R probability variation big hit A end command, 2R probability variation big hit B end command, 2R non-probability variable big hit end command and small hit end command are received. The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 performs display mode control on the effect display device 202 (FIG. 89 (E1)) and then performs special mode 2 control (FIG. 89 (F1)). On the other hand, if a game ball is not detected by the first receiving detection sensor 442 when a 2R probability variable big hit A end command, 2R probability variable big hit B end command, 2R non-probable variable big hit end command and small hit end command are received, a predetermined effect is given. In this example, after executing the effect that the ball hit by the character displayed on the effect display device 202 does not enter the cup (FIG. 89 (E2)), the control of the mode determined in the end mode effect setting process is performed. This is performed (FIG. 89 (F2)).

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 89 (F1) and 89 (F2), in this example, the display mode of the effect display device 202 for each mode (background image that is controlled to be displayed in an area other than the decorative symbols in the effect display device 202) And the character controlled for display as a decorative pattern are different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp which mode is controlled by visually recognizing the effect display device 202.

  As described above, when the 2R probability variation big hit A end command, 2R probability variation big hit B end command, 2R non-probability variable big hit end command and small hit end command are received, the first acceptance detection sensor 442 does not detect a game ball. Occasionally, when the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are controlled to a high probability state, the special mode is controlled at a high rate. Specifically, the mode to be controlled after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is decided based on the high probability special mode decision table in which the ratio to be decided as the special mode is set high.

  In addition, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 displays a predetermined effect shown in FIG. 89 (F2) when controlling to the special mode after the end of the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. Control to the mode before starting the gaming state and the small hit gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, a predetermined effect (in this example, an effect for causing a character to appear on the effect display device 202). Is executed, the player is notified that the special mode is to be controlled by performing display control of “X mode entry” on the effect display device 202 (FIG. 90 (B)). As described above, after the 2R big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are finished, the other mode is controlled once, and the effect of switching to the special mode is executed in the middle of the mode control. It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the big hit.

  In this example, an effect called “mission effect” is executed as a special mode. The mission effect is to notify a player of a mission (for example, “Have a reach of 5!” Etc.), and when the mission is achieved (becomes a reach of 5), a big hit (in this example, 15R probable big hit) ). The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines one of a plurality of types of missions when controlling to the special mode, and notifies the player of the missions (FIG. 90C).

  The sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 receives a fluctuation pattern that becomes a 15R probability variation big hit as a result of the fluctuation display from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 when controlling to the special mode. (In the example shown in FIG. 91A, in the example shown in FIG. 91A, the effect display device 202 performs display control of “congratulations monkey.”) And at the same time displays that the mission has been achieved (FIG. 91 ( In the example shown in B), “winning” and display control are performed on the effect display device 202. Thereafter, the effect display device 202 is displayed and controlled in a variation manner corresponding to the variation pattern received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, and the 15R probability variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  It should be noted that when the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 is controlling to the special mode, if the fluctuation pattern that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit as a result of the fluctuation display is not received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, the mission Do not perform the production to achieve. Specifically, when a special mode is controlled by the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92, a fluctuation pattern that becomes 2R big hit and small hit as a result of the fluctuation display is received from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94. In such a case, an effect different from the effect of accomplishing the mission (for example, an effect of controlling the display of the character on the effect display device 202 and performing a predetermined display (such as "Now, ...")) is performed. In addition, when the number of executions of the special mode elapses before receiving a variation pattern that becomes a 15R probability variation big hit as a result of variation display from the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94, an effect that ends the special mode (for example, an effect display device) After performing display control of the character at 202 and performing a predetermined display (such as “see you again”), control is performed to the change destination mode.

  Thus, although the mission effect is an effect executed by the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92, it is executed based on the lottery result as to whether or not to make a big hit by the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94. The Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the 15R probability variation big hit is not achieved even though the mission is achieved. Further, the mission effect is an effect executed by the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 in a state where it is not determined that it will be a big hit, and the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 94 is determined to be a big hit. If the control is in the special mode, the probability of achieving the mission is high when the control is in the high probability state. If state control is not performed, the probability of achieving a mission is low.

  In addition, when the control in the special mode is not executed in the high-probability state, there is a high ratio that the special mode ends before the mission is achieved. Therefore, the expectation for the special mode is lowered, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. As described above, in this example, when the control in the high probability state is executed when the mode is controlled in any one of the mode 1, the mode 2 and the mode 3, the ratio of the control in the special mode is set high. Therefore, when controlling to the special mode, the ratio of controlling to the high probability state is high, and the ratio of executing the effect of achieving the mission in the special mode is high. Therefore, when the player is controlled in the special mode, the player's sense of expectation for 15R probability variation big hit can be improved, and the interest is improved.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball that is driven into the game area 37 is sent to the sorting device 330, first, it is sent to the entry port 334 through the storage passage 356. However, at this time, if a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 356, the game balls sent to the sorting device 330 are discharged through the discharge passage 358 without being distributed. When the rotating body 348 rotates and the game ball storage portion 346 communicates with the intrusion port 334, only one game ball stored in the storage passage 356 passes through the intrusion port 334 in the guide passage 332 and the game. The ball enters the ball storage portion 346 and is stored. Then, the rotating body 348 is rotated in the direction of the first distribution port 336 in a state where the game ball is stored in the game ball storage unit 346 so that the first distribution port 336 and the game ball storage unit 346 communicate with each other. Then, the game balls stored in the game ball storage unit 346 are distributed to the first distribution port 336. On the other hand, when the game ball is received in the game ball storage portion 346, the rotating body 348 is rotated in the direction opposite to the first distribution port 336 to cause the game ball storage portion 346 to communicate with the communication passage 342. The second distribution port 338 and the third distribution through the communication passage 342 that inclines so that the game balls stored in the ball storage unit 346 descend toward the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340. It is sent between the mouth 340. In this state, when the rotator 348 is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotator 348 is distributed to the first distribution port 336 and the game ball storage portion 346 is communicated with the second distribution port 338, the game ball storage portion 346 is stored. The game balls thus distributed are distributed to the second distribution port 338, and the rotating body 348 is rotated in the same direction as the distribution direction to the first distribution port 336, so that the game ball storage portion 346 and the third distribution port 340 are rotated. When communicated, the game balls stored in the game ball storage unit 346 are distributed to the third distribution port 340. Thereafter, the game balls distributed to any of the distribution ports 336, 338, and 340 are a first discharge portion 396 and a second discharge portion that are composed of crunes arranged on the downstream side of the distribution ports 336, 338, and 340, respectively. 402 and the third discharge portion 408, and rotate in a spiral shape within the croon and discharged downward from substantially the center of the discharge portions 396, 402, and 408. Note that the barrier 368 provided in the rotating body 348 prevents the intrusion port 334 from communicating with anything other than the game ball housing 346. Further, with respect to the first distribution port 336 that is open to the outer periphery of the guide passage 332, the game ball is transferred to the first distribution port 336 by the guide inclined surface 360 formed at the corresponding position of the guide passage 332. It comes to move.

  Thereby, it can be set as the distribution apparatus 330 which can distribute a game ball to any of the three distribution openings 336, 338, and 340 only by rotating the one rotary body 348, and this distribution apparatus 330 is made into the distribution apparatus 330. By using it for the pachinko machine 1, among the flow paths to the first receiving port 410 as described above, the flow channel that is received with the highest probability into the first receiving port 410, and the second with the next highest probability. The game balls can be distributed to either a flow path that is received by the first receiving port 410 or a flow path that is hardly received by the first receiving port 410.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to use a plurality of sorting devices as in the case of using a conventional sorting device, and the proportion of the pachinko machine 1 is increased by suppressing an increase in the size of the sorting device 330 that sorts game balls. The game area 37 can be prevented from decreasing and the game ball is allowed to flow down to a wider range to prevent the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous, thereby reducing the player's interest Can be suppressed. Further, since the distribution device 330 can be prevented from increasing in size, the distribution device 330 can be made difficult to interfere with other members such as the attacker device 270 provided in the pachinko machine 1, By interfering with the members, it becomes impossible to arrange other members and the pachinko machine 1 which is poor in change can be prevented, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from being lowered.

  Furthermore, the game ball that has entered the game ball housing portion 346 of the rotating body 348 from the entry port 334 remains in the guide passage 332, and the width of the guide passage 332 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. Thus, only one game ball will enter the game ball housing portion 346 from the intrusion port 334, and the game balls can be distributed one by one to any of the distribution ports 336, 338, 340. Prevent the game balls from being distributed to the plurality of distribution ports 336, 338, and 340, and make sure that the movement of the game balls distributed by the distribution device 330 is visually recognized one by one, and that the movement is sufficiently It is possible to entertain and enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the rotating body 348 is provided with a barrier portion 368 that prevents the game ball from entering the entrance 334, when the entrance 334 and the game ball housing portion 346 of the rotor 348 are not in communication, The entrance 334 can be closed by the barrier portion 368 of the rotator 348, and the game ball passes through the entry port 334 and enters a place other than the game ball housing portion 346, causing a problem, It can prevent being discharged without being sorted.

  Furthermore, since the intrusion port 334 and the distribution ports 336, 338, and 340 are arranged to be opened on the outer periphery of the guide passage 332 or on the lower side in the axial direction (on the guide passage 332), on the inner periphery side of the guide passage 332 Compared with the case where the entrance 334 or the like is opened, the space on the inner peripheral side can be made as small as possible. That is, since the inner diameter of the guide passage 332 can be made as small as possible, the sorting device 330 can be further downsized, and the space occupied by the sorting device 330 in the pachinko machine 1 can be made as small as possible. Thus, it is possible to widen the distribution space of the game balls, or to arrange other members such as a stage effect and a decorative body, which can further enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, since the axis of the rotating body 348 extends in the vertical direction, the rotating surface of the rotating body 348 becomes substantially horizontal, and the height of the sorting device 330 in the vertical direction can be reduced as much as possible. The height on the downstream side of the distribution device 330 becomes relatively high, and the game ball effect space 308 including the flow path of the game ball is widened so that various movements (rolling effects) can be performed on the game ball. It is possible to increase the interest of the player by making the movement of the game ball more enjoyable.

  Further, since the communication passage 342 is formed so as to become lower in the direction of the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340, the game ball sent from the entry port 334 to the end of the communication passage 342 However, due to gravity, it naturally rolls in the direction of the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340, and can be reliably moved between the second distribution port 338 and the third distribution port 340. Even if the shaft core is disposed so as to extend in the vertical direction, the game balls can be reliably distributed to any of the distribution ports 336, 338, and 340.

  Further, since the guide inclined surface 360 that is lowered toward the first distribution port 336 that opens to the outer periphery of the guide passage 332 is provided, even if the guide passage 332 is arranged to extend in a substantially horizontal direction, the guide passage When the game ball is moved to the guide inclined surface 360 formed on 332, the game ball rolls along the guide inclined surface 360 to the first distribution port 336 and passes through the first distribution port 336. Therefore, the game balls can be reliably distributed to the first distribution port 336.

  In addition, since the detection unit 372 and the rotation position detection sensor 384 are provided as rotation position detection means capable of detecting the rotation position of the rotation body 348, the rotation position of the rotation body 348 can be detected by the rotation position detection means. The game ball housing portion 346 of the rotating body 348 can be rotated so as to be surely communicated with the intrusion port 334, the distribution ports 336, 338, 340, and the like.

  Even if a large number of game balls are supplied to the upstream side of the entry port 334 at a time, the supplied game balls are stored in the storage passage 356 up to a predetermined number, and the game balls overflowing from the storage passage 356 are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unnecessarily stagnation on the upstream side of the entry port 334, and to prevent a problem caused by the game ball that has stagnated. It can be suppressed that the interest of the player is lowered by interruption.

  Further, the game balls distributed to the distribution ports 336, 338, and 340 are rotated in a spiral shape by the crunes of the respective discharge portions 396, 402, and 408, and then discharged downward. Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the sorting device 330 to the downstream side can be made uniform, and the desired effect operation can be surely given to the game ball in the downstream channel. It is possible to entertain the player by the production operation and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the game balls that rotate in a spiral shape can be visually recognized in each croon, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game balls in the croon, and the game balls are released by rotating in the croon. By the moment, the flow of the game sphere is stopped, and the expectation of the game sphere that performs the downstream operation is enhanced by the moment of time, so that it is possible to expect an effect that can further enhance the interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine or the like in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated. The present invention can also be applied.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although what imaged golf was shown as the concept of the pachinko machine 1, for example, in addition to ball games such as baseball, tennis, basketball, and volleyball, martial arts, adventure movies, game scenes, etc. It may be an image, and by showing the movement of the game media full of dynamism, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the decoration space 240 of the decoration unit 240 fixed to the rear side of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 is three-dimensionally configured by various decoration bodies 312, the light emitting means 314, the effect unit 318, and the like. However, in the production space 310, for example, a movable production actor or a movable ornament that can move depending on the game situation may be arranged, so that it can be connected to other pachinko machines. In addition to being able to achieve differentiation, it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by delighting the movement of the moving director and decoration.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, what showed the axis | shaft of the rotary body 348 in the distribution apparatus 330 arrange | positioned so that it might extend in the up-down direction was shown, but it may arrange | position so that the axis center may extend in a substantially horizontal direction, for example. good.

[Driving motor drive control]
Next, drive control of the sorting motor 350 shown in FIG. 41 will be described. Here, not a sequential flowchart but a flowchart that is actually performed every time a timer interrupt occurs is used. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms sorter motor scheduler start process, FIG. 93 is a table showing an example of a drive pattern of the sort motor scheduler, and FIG. 94 shows a 2 ms sort motor scheduler start. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of processing, FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of scheduler progress processing of a 2 ms sorting motor, and FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of driving processing of the sorting motor. The scheduler activation process of the 16 ms sorting motor is performed as one process of the 16 ms steady process of step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. 71, and the sorting motor drive process is a step in the sub-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is performed as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process of S2120.

  The rotation direction of the drive shaft 374 of the sorting motor 350 is expressed as CW (Clock Wise) when the rotating body 348 rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. The case of rotating clockwise is referred to as CCW (Counter Clock Wise).

[Regarding the scheduler startup process of a 16 ms sorting motor]
When the scheduler activation process of the 16 ms sorting motor is started, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 shown in FIG. 41 has the rotating body 348 in its original position (see FIG. 31A). It is determined whether or not the indicated rotating body 348 is in the original position (step S2170). This determination is made based on whether or not the slit 370 formed in the detection unit 372 of the rotating body 348 has been detected by the rotation position detection sensor 384. Specifically, it is performed based on a history (sampling history) of transition from a state where the optical axis of the rotational position detection sensor 384 is blocked to a state where it is not blocked. This sampling history is created as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process in step S2120 in the sub timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the sampling history matches the history determination value stored in advance in the sub-integrated ROM 522 shown in FIG. 41, it is determined that the rotating body 348 is in the original position. On the other hand, when they do not match, it is determined that the rotating body 348 is not in the original position.

  When the rotating body 348 is in the original position in step S2170, a sorting motor, which will be described later, based on the analysis result of the command analysis process performed as one process of the 16 ms steady process of step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. The scheduler drive pattern is set (step S2172), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when the rotating body 348 is not in the original position in step S2170, the original position returning operation process is performed (step S2174), and this routine is ended. This original position return process is a process of controlling the drive of the sorting motor 350 based on an original position return drive pattern, which will be described later, and returning the rotating body 348 to the original position.

[Driving motor scheduler drive pattern]
The drive pattern of the scheduler of the sorting motor is the original position return drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (a), the RAM clear drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (b), the test drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (c), A total of seven patterns are prepared: a left route drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (d), a middle route drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (e), and a right route drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (f). , Data 1, data 2,..., Data n. In step S2172 in the 16 ms sorting motor scheduler activation process shown in FIG. 92, for example, the left route driving pattern is set as the driving data for the sorting motor scheduler. The driving time is set as data for slowing up the first 10 steps, that is, 40 ms (= 4 ms × 10 steps) so that data 0 of each driving pattern hits at the start of driving of the sorting motor 350 so as not to step out. Has been.

  The drive pattern for returning to the original position is a drive pattern for returning the rotating body 348 to the original position. Specifically, the sorting motor 350 is rotated once. Thereby, the game ball (one ball) stored in the guide passage 332 of the rotating body 348 is discharged to the outside. Note that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the original position return process of the rotating body 348 is always performed, and therefore the original position return drive pattern is read out first.

  In the drive pattern for RAM clear, a command that indicates that the RAM clear switch 94a shown in FIG. 41 has been operated is transmitted from the main control board 94. When this command is received, the driving pattern shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. It is a drive pattern for discharging the game balls stored in the storage passage 356 of the minute device 330 and returning to the original position. Specifically, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so as to discharge the game ball from the middle route shown in FIG. Here, when the RAM clear switch 94a is operated, the game is returned to a state where the game can be resumed. However, as described above, the storage passage 356 can store five game balls. If the game balls are not discharged to the outside as quickly as possible, the game balls will be returned in a state where they are discharged or in a state where they cannot be discharged (a state where game balls are stored). Thereby, even if the RAM clear switch 94a is operated to delete the game information from the built-in RAM of the main control MPU 504 of the main control board 92, the game balls stored by the game before the RAM clear switch 94a is operated remain. As a result, there is a risk that the entire game content will not be erased. In order to avoid this, the game balls stored in the storage passage 356 are dealt with by discharging them from the middle route to the outside. This middle route is designed so that the time during which the game ball after falling rolls within the effect unit 318 is shorter than the left route and the right route. Since the RAM clear switch 94a is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the original position return drive pattern is read out in the original position return process of the rotating body 348 when the power is turned on, and one ball The game balls are discharged to the outside, and then the five game balls from which the RAM clear driving pattern is read are discharged to the outside. In this way, a maximum of 6 game balls can be discharged. This is because, as described above, when the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage passage 356 and the game balls taken into the guide passage 332 are combined, there are six balls. In addition, in the RAM clear driving pattern, the game ball from the middle route regardless of the presence or absence of the detection signal from the intrusion detection sensor 382, that is, whether or not the game ball is stored in the storage passage 356. , The distribution motor 350 is rotated so as to be discharged (so as to be distributed to the second distribution port 338 and guided to the game ball effect space 308). Further, in the RAM clear driving pattern, the middle route is within the 30-second period in which the decoration lamp 530 is controlled to be turned on in order to notify that all the contents stored in the internal RAM of the main control MPU 504 have been erased (cleared). Then, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so that the game balls are discharged from the player (so that the game balls are distributed to the second sorting port 338 and guided to the game ball effect space 308). As a result, the game ball stored in the storage passage 356 is guided to the game ball effect space 308 before the decoration lamp 530 is turned on. Therefore, after the decoration lamp 530 is turned on, the player starts the game. However, immediately after the start of the game, the game balls not related to the production are not discharged from the middle route, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The test drive pattern is a drive pattern for inspecting whether or not game balls are discharged from the left route, the middle route, and the right route of the sorting device 330 in the production line inspection process. Specifically, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so that the game ball is discharged from the left route shown in FIG. 31 (a), and the game ball is discharged from the middle route shown in FIG. 32 (e). Rotate the minute motor 350, rotate the sorting motor 350 to discharge the game ball from the right route shown in FIG. 32 (f), and once again set the distribution motor 350 to discharge the game ball from the middle route. Further, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so as to discharge the game ball from the middle route again. Production line inspectors (operators) use 3 game balls at the time of inspection, but since 4 or 5 balls may be used, extra game balls are discharged to the outside as quickly as possible. This is achieved by discharging the extra game balls, that is, the extra stored game balls from the middle route to the outside. As described above, this middle route is designed as a shortest route, that is, a shorter time for the game ball after rolling to roll in the effect unit 318 compared to the left route and the right route. At the time of inspection, a game ball is inserted from the grand prize winning port 272. The game ball that has entered the special prize winning port 272 enters the storage passage 356 and is stored therein. At this time, the game ball that has entered the storage passage 356 is detected by the intrusion detection sensor 382 as described above. When detected by the intrusion detection sensor 382, the intrusion information is stored in a RAM built in the sub-integrated MPU 520. At the time of inspection, the sub-integrated MPU 530 determines whether or not the intrusion information is stored from the built-in RAM. When the intrusion information is stored, the sub-integrated MPU 530 regards that the game ball is stored in the storage passage 356. Then, the distribution motor 350 is driven and controlled, and the stored game balls are distributed to the left route (the first distribution port 336 and guided to the game ball effect space 308), the middle route (the second distribution port 338). To the game ball effect space 308), the right route (assigned to the third distribution port 340 and guided to the game ball effect space 308), the middle route, and the middle route in order. In addition, when all of the left route, the middle route, and the right route are allotted one by one, the inspection of each route of the sorting device 330 is completed, but the game balls as remaining balls stored in the storage passage 356 are used as game balls. When guiding to the effect space 308, at least the number of the left route, the middle route, and the right route (three routes) from the maximum number (6 balls in the present embodiment) in which the game balls are stored in the storage passage 356. In order to drive and control the sorting motor 350 for the time required to distribute and discharge the number of game balls (3 balls = 6 balls-3 routes) to the middle route which is the shortest route, the storage passage 356 In addition to reliably removing the remaining balls stored in the sorting device 356, game balls that are originally unnecessary for the inspection can be quickly removed.

  The left route driving pattern is a driving pattern for discharging the game balls stored in the storage passage 356 of the sorting device 330 from the left route and returning to the original position. Specifically, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so as to discharge the game ball from the left route shown in FIG.

  The middle route drive pattern is a drive pattern for discharging the game balls stored in the storage passage 356 of the sorting apparatus 330 from the middle route and returning to the original position. Specifically, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so as to discharge the game ball from the middle route shown in FIG.

  The right route drive pattern is a drive pattern for discharging the game balls stored in the storage passage 356 of the sorting apparatus 330 from the right route and returning to the original position. Specifically, the sorting motor 350 is rotated so as to discharge the game ball from the right route shown in FIG.

[Regarding the scheduler startup process of the 2ms sorting motor]
When the scheduler activation process for the 2 ms distribution motor is started, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines whether or not the address set flag ST-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. Step S2180). This address set flag ST-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the start address of the above-described sorting motor scheduler drive pattern is set, and to a value of 0 when it is not set (when ready to set). Is done.

  If the address set flag ST-FLG is 0 in step S2180, that is, if the start address of the sorting motor scheduler drive pattern is not set, the start address of the sort motor scheduler drive pattern is set ( Step S2182). The head address of the driving pattern of the sorting motor scheduler indicates data 0 of the driving pattern of the sorting motor scheduler set in step S2172 in the scheduler activation processing of the 16 ms sorting motor shown in FIG. 92 (for example, Left route driving pattern data 0 shown in FIG. 93).

  Subsequent to step S2182, a value 1 is set in ST-FLG assuming that the start address of the drive pattern of the scheduler of the sorting motor is set (step S2184), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the address set flag is not 0 (value 1) in step S2180, that is, if the start address of the driving pattern of the scheduler of the sorting motor is set, this routine is terminated as it is.

[About the scheduler progress process of the 2ms sorting motor]
When the scheduler progress process of the 2 ms distribution motor is started, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 determines whether or not the drive time has ended as shown in FIG. 95 (step S2190). This determination is performed based on whether or not the drive time set in the drive pattern data of the scheduler of the sorting motor has elapsed. Specifically, for example, the drive time 40 ms set in the left route drive pattern data 0 shown in FIG. 93 is subtracted by the 2 ms timer batch subtraction process in the distribution motor drive process described later, and then the value It is performed depending on whether or not it becomes zero.

  When the drive time has elapsed in step S2190, the drive pattern data of the scheduler of the sorting motor is advanced by one (for example, the data from the left route drive pattern data 0 shown in FIG. 93 is advanced to data 1, step S2192), It is determined whether or not there is data (step S2194). This determination is made based on whether or not the advanced data includes a drive data termination factor. For example, if the drive data end factor is included in the final data 10 of the left route drive pattern shown in FIG. 93, it means that the left route drive pattern ends.

  If the drive data end factor is included in step S2194, the address set flag ST-FLG is set to 0 (step S2196) on the assumption that the start address of the drive pattern of the next sorting motor scheduler is ready. ), This routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the driving time has not elapsed in step S2190 or when the driving data end factor is not included in step S2194, this routine is ended as it is.

[Driving motor drive processing]
When the distribution motor driving process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 performs a 2 ms timer batch subtraction process as shown in FIG. 96 (step S2200). In this 2 ms timer batch subtraction process, the process of subtracting the driving time of the driving pattern of the scheduler of the sorting motor described above by 2 ms is performed. For example, in the left route driving pattern data 0 shown in FIG. 93, the driving time is 40 ms to 2 ms, 38 ms, 36 ms,..., And 0 ms each time the 2 ms timer batch subtraction process is performed. .

  Subsequent to step S2200, scheduler activation processing of a 2 ms sorting motor is performed (step S2202). In the 2 ms distribution motor scheduler activation process, as shown in FIG. 94, a process of setting the start address of the drive pattern of the distribution motor scheduler that drives the distribution motor 350 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S2202, a scheduler progress process for the 2 ms sorting motor is performed (step S2204). In the scheduler process for the 2 ms sorting motor, as shown in FIG. 95, a process for causing the sorting motor 350 to proceed based on the drive pattern of the sorting motor scheduler is performed.

Subsequent to step S2204, distribution motor drive data is created (step S220).
6) The generated sorting motor drive data is output as drive data MT-DAT to the lamp drive board 532 (step S2208), and this routine is terminated.

  The sub-integrated MPU 520 synchronizes with the transfer clock MT-CLK from the distribution motor serial output transmission port 520b shown in FIG. 42, and in step S2208 described above, the highest level of the distribution motor drive data as the drive data MT-DAT. Bits to the least significant bit are output to the lamp driving substrate 532 one bit at a time. As a result, the distribution motor drive data is shifted to the serial / parallel converter 532 b of the lamp drive substrate 532. As shown in FIG. 42, when the latch signal MT-LAT is input from the parallel output port (output port) 520c of the sub-integrated MPU 520, the serial / parallel conversion unit 532b receives the drive data MT- Based on the DAT, a sorting motor drive signal is output to the sorting device driving unit 532c, and the sorting device driving unit 532c outputs each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the sorting motor 350. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) is output to, the CW or CCW rotational motion of the sorting motor 350 is obtained.

[About drive pattern selection at power-on]
Next, drive control when the sorting motor 350 shown in FIG. 41 is powered on will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on drive pattern selection process. The power-on drive pattern selection process is performed as one process of the 16 ms steady process of step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG.

  When the power-on drive pattern selection process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 520 of the peripheral control board 92 shown in FIG. 41 receives the command from the main control board 94 as shown in FIG. The type is checked (step S2210). Specifically, the command is received in the command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 73 and the command reception end interrupt process shown in FIG. 74, and is performed as one process of the 16 ms steady process in step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. The command received by the command analysis process is analyzed. In step S2210, the type is examined based on the analyzed command.

  When the command received in step S2210 is a RAM clear notification command, the RAM clear driving pattern shown in FIG. 93B is selected (step S2212), and this routine is terminated. As described above, this RAM clear driving pattern is a driving pattern for discharging the game balls stored in the storage passage 356 of the sorting apparatus 330 and returning to the original position as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32. It is. When the RAM clear driving pattern is selected, specifically, the 16 ms steady process in step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. 71, and the 16 ms sorting motor scheduler start process shown in FIG. A time driving pattern is set. Thereafter, each time the 2 ms timer interrupt process of step S2120 in the sub timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 72 is performed, the data is sequentially read from the drive data at the head address along the RAM clear drive pattern, Output to the sorting motor.

  On the other hand, when the command received in step S2210 is a test command, the test drive pattern shown in FIG. 93 (d) is selected (step S2214), and this routine is terminated. As described above, this test driving pattern is a driving pattern for inspecting whether or not game balls are discharged from the left route, middle route, and right route of the sorting device 330 in the production line inspection process. is there. When the test drive pattern is selected, specifically, in the 16 ms steady process in step S2108 in the reset process shown in FIG. 71, the test drive pattern in the scheduler start process of the 16 ms sorter motor shown in FIG. Is set. Thereafter, each time the 2 ms timer interrupt process of step S2120 in the sub-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 72 is performed, data is sequentially read from the drive data at the head address in accordance with the test drive pattern. Output to the motor.

  In the present embodiment, during the test (during the execution of the test drive pattern), if a command related to an effect is received, the test is immediately interrupted and the effect process based on the command is executed. Yes. As a result, even if the command received during the game process is mistakenly recognized as a test command and the test is started, the test state can be immediately exited and returned to the game process, giving the player a sense of incongruity as much as possible. There is no such thing.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above includes the game board 5, the decoration unit 240, the main control board 94, the peripheral control board 92, and the lamp driving board 532. A game area 37 is defined in the game board 5, and the decoration unit 240 is attached to the game board 5. The decoration unit 240 includes a sorting device 330 including a plurality of light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ capable of emitting light, and a sorting motor 350 that is a four-phase stepping motor having A phase, / A phase, B phase, and / B phase. And. The main control board 94 controls the progress of the game, and the peripheral control board 92 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 94. The peripheral control board 92 transmits the lamp data LP-DAT of the plurality of light emitting means and the drive data MT-DAT of the sorting motor 350 to the lamp drive board 532 based on the received command. The lamp driving board 532 that receives the lamp data LP-DAT and the driving data MT-DAT is provided separately from the main control board 94 and the peripheral control board 92, and the light emitting means 314 'is mounted thereon.

  The lamp driving substrate 532 includes gradation control IC groups A to E and a drive IC 1. The gradation control IC groups A to E output gradation lighting signals to the light emitting means 314 and 314 ′ based on the received lamp data LP-DAT, and the drive IC1 distributes the motor based on the received driving data MT-DAT. A drive pulse (excitation signal) is output to 350.

  The drive IC1 includes Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4. The Darlington power transistor PTr1 outputs a driving pulse (excitation signal) to the A phase of the sorting motor 350, and the Darlington power transistor PTr2 outputs a driving pulse (excitation signal) to the / A phase of the sorting motor 350. PTr3 outputs a drive pulse (excitation signal) to the B phase of the sorting motor 350, and the Darlington power transistor PTr4 outputs a drive pulse (excitation signal) to the / B phase of the sorting motor 350.

  The drive IC 1 further includes flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4. The flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are formed into a chip, and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD3 and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD4. Is chipped.

  The flyback voltage absorption diode FBD1 converts back electromotive force generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) is interrupted to the A phase of the distribution motor 350 into heat, and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD2 is the distribution motor. The back electromotive force generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) is interrupted to the / A phase of 350 is converted into heat, and the flyback voltage absorbing diode FBD3 is driven to the B phase of the distribution motor 350 (excitation signal). ) Is converted into heat, and the flyback voltage absorption diode FBD4 is the reverse generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) is cut off in the / B phase of the sorting motor 350. The electromotive force is converted into heat. The converted heat, that is, heat generated from the chips of the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2, and heat generated from the chips of the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are absorbed by the package of the drive IC1. It has become.

  The drive data MT-DAT is created so that the chips of the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 and the chips of the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 can dissipate heat alternately.

  Thus, the drive data MT-DAT is created so that the chips of the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 and FBD2 and the chips of the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD3 and FBD4 can alternately dissipate heat. It becomes difficult for heat to be stored in the package of the drive IC 1. As a result, the junction temperature of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 does not increase to the junction temperature. Therefore, failure of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 due to heat can be prevented.

[About another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine or a pachinko machine The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine (which performs a slot game using a game ball) in which a slot machine is fused.

It is a front view which shows the whole front side of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was further opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a front view of a game board having a game area. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from the upper right diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from the upper left diagonal front. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally backward. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is BB sectional drawing in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board for every main component and shows from diagonally forward. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each major component and shown obliquely from the rear. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the front structural member in a game board, a holding plate, and a holding plate support frame. It is a cross-sectional side view in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a holding plate support frame and a decoration unit. (A) is a front view of a central accessory, (B) is a rear view of the central accessory shown with the partition plate removed. It is a perspective view which shows a center accessory from the upper right diagonally forward. It is a front view which shows schematic structure of the attacker apparatus with which the central accessory was equipped. It is a front view of a decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows a decoration unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a decoration unit for every main structural member. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows for every main structural member which mainly comprises effect space. (A) is a perspective view showing an effect unit, (B) is a perspective view of the effect unit shown from a direction different from (A). It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the distribution apparatus in a production | presentation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the distribution apparatus shown from a different direction from FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the distribution operation | movement in a distribution apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the distribution operation | movement in the distribution apparatus following from FIG. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows a decoration unit from diagonally backward in the state which removed the unit support member. It is a perspective view which shows a part of decoration body from a back with a part of effect unit. It is the schematic which shows arrangement | positioning of a light emission means. (A) is a drawing substitute photo in which the game board is copied from the front with the light emitting means turned on, and (B) is a drawing substitute photo in which the game board is copied from the front with the light emitting means turned off. is there. (A) is a drawing substitute photograph in which the vicinity of the logo decoration body of the game board is copied from an oblique side, and (B) is a drawing substitute photograph in which a part of the game board is copied from above. (A) is a drawing substitute photograph in which the game board according to the present invention is copied from the front, and (B) is a drawing substitute photograph in which the conventional game board is copied from the front. (A) is a drawing substitute photograph in which the game board according to the present invention is photographed from the diagonally left front, and (B) is a drawing substitute photograph in which the conventional game board is photographed from the diagonally left front. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a lamp drive substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a lamp control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows a current mirror circuit. It is a circuit diagram of a distribution apparatus drive part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the equivalent circuit of drive IC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. 49 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of FIG. 48. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the interruption process regularly performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. The table used for the lottery process about a display mode. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. A table used for lottery processing for types of jackpots. The table which shows the mode at the time of the fluctuation stop of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning opening opening pre-processing performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the process during big prize opening opening | opening performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning opening opening post-process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the time reduction setting process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the start gate passage process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol standby process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the movable piece drive process performed by main control MPU of the main control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command reception end interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the periphery control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the change production start process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal time mode effect setting process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. Table used for lottery processing for modes. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the game ball distribution determination process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. The table used for the lottery process about the game ball distribution destination. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the process during change production performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the change production end process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the round production process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the end time mode effect setting process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the end time mode effect setting process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the end time mode effect setting process performed by the sub integrated MPU of the peripheral control board of the embodiment. Table used for lottery processing for modes. It is an example of the effect performed with an effect display apparatus. It is an example of the effect performed with an effect display apparatus. It is an example of the effect performed with an effect display apparatus. It is an example of the effect performed with an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the scheduler starting process of the distribution motor for 16 ms. It is a table which shows an example of the drive pattern of the scheduler of a distribution motor. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the scheduler starting process of the distribution motor for 2 ms. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the scheduler progress process of the distribution motor for 2 ms. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drive process of a sorting motor. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the drive pattern selection process at the time of power activation.

Explanation of symbols

1 Pachinko machine (Pachinko machine)
5 Game board (game board)
37 gaming area 92 peripheral control board (peripheral control board)
94 Main control board (Main control board)
94a RAM clear switch 125 Ball dispenser 128 Launch motor 130 Launcher unit 131 Power supply board 131a + 34V creation circuit 131b + 18V creation circuit 131c + 9V creation circuit 133 Discharge control board 200 Central character 202 Effect display device 204 Gate 206 Gate sensor 210 Variable prize Ball device 212 First start port 214 Second start port 216 First start port sensor 218 Second start port sensor 222 Movable piece 240 Decoration unit (decoration unit)
270 Attacker 272 Large winning opening 274 Opening / closing member 276 Attacker solenoid 278 Count sensor 302 Special symbol display 304 Special symbol hold indicator 306 Status indicator 308 Game ball effect space 310 Effect space 314 Light emitting means 318 Effect unit 322 Normal symbol indicator 324 Normal symbol hold indicator 330 Sorting device (movable device)
332 Guide passage 334 Advancement entrance 336 First distribution port 338 Second distribution port 340 Third distribution port 342 Communication passage 344 Distribution base member 346 Game ball housing portion 348 Rotating body 350 Distribution motor 352 Distribution cover member 354 Entrance entrance 356 Storage passage 358 Discharge passage 360 Guide inclined surface 362 First distribution passage 364 Opening portion 366 Inner peripheral wall 368 Barrier portion 370 Slit 372 Detection portion 374 Drive shaft 376 Shaft portion 378 Motor fixing portion 380 Insertion hole 382 Intrusion detection sensor 384 Rotational position detection sensor 396 First discharge unit 402 Second discharge unit 408 Third discharge unit 410 First reception port 414 Rolling reception stage 416 Central stage 418 Guide guidance stage 420 Rebound flight stage 442 First reception detection sensor 444 Second Acceptance detection sensor 500 Main board 502 Peripheral board 504 Main control MPU
520 Sub-integrated MPU
532 Lamp drive board (lamp drive board)
532d + 5V Lamp Drive Series Regulator 532e + 18V Lamp Drive Series Regulator Gradation Control IC Group A to E Gradation Control IC (Light Emitting Control IC)
LP-DAT Ramp data MT-DAT Drive data IC1 Drive IC (Drive IC)
FBD1 Flyback voltage absorption diode (A phase flyback voltage absorption diode)
FBD2 flyback voltage absorption diode (/ A phase flyback voltage absorption diode)
FBD3 Flyback voltage absorption diode (B phase flyback voltage absorption diode)
FBD4 Flyback voltage absorption diode (/ B phase flyback voltage absorption diode)
PTr1 Darlington power transistor (A-phase transistor chip)
PTr2 Darlington power transistor (/ A phase transistor chip)
PTr3 Darlington power transistor (B phase transistor chip)
PTr4 Darlington power transistor (/ B phase transistor chip)

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is partitioned;
A decoration unit comprising a plurality of light emitting means attached to the game board and capable of emitting light, and a movable body device including a four-phase stepping motor having A phase, / A phase, B phase and / B phase; ,
A main control board for controlling the progress of the game;
Periphery that receives a command transmitted from the main control board and transmits light emission data of the plurality of light emitting means and drive data of the four-phase stepping motor to a subordinate board based on the received command A control board;
A lamp driving board provided separately from the main control board and the peripheral control board, a part of the plurality of light emitting means being mounted, and receiving the light emission data and the drive data;
A pachinko machine equipped with
The lamp driving substrate is at least
A light emission control IC that outputs a light emission signal to the plurality of light emission means based on the received light emission data;
A drive IC that outputs an excitation signal to the four-phase stepping motor based on the received drive data;
With
The drive IC is at least
An A-phase transistor chip that outputs the excitation signal to the A-phase of the four-phase stepping motor;
A / A phase transistor chip that outputs the excitation signal to the / A phase of the four-phase stepping motor;
A B-phase transistor chip that outputs the excitation signal to the B-phase of the four-phase stepping motor;
A / B phase transistor chip that outputs the excitation signal to the / B phase of the four-phase stepping motor;
A flyback voltage absorbing diode for A phase that converts back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is interrupted to A phase of the four-phase stepping motor into heat;
A back-electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is cut off in the / A phase of the four-phase stepping motor is converted into heat with a chip for the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode. A flyback voltage absorbing diode;
A flyback voltage absorbing diode for B phase that converts back electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is interrupted to B phase of the stepping motor into heat;
The back-electromotive force generated when the excitation signal is cut off to the / B phase of the four-phase stepping motor is converted into heat with the B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode as a chip. A flyback voltage absorbing diode;
Built-in,
The drive data includes the A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode and the / A-phase flyback voltage absorption diode chip, the B-phase flyback voltage absorption diode, and the / B-phase flyback voltage. A pachinko machine that is constructed so that the chip of the absorbing diode and the chip can dissipate heat alternately.